JP2022145823A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement.

SOLUTION: In a game area PE, an upper operation port 303 into which a game ball can enter, and an electric accessory 307 are provided. The electric accessory 307 can shift between an open state in which a game ball can be received in the upper operation port 303 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received in the upper operation port 303. A light emitting part is provided above the electric accessory 307. In the light emitting part, a specific notification corresponding to a shift control of the electric accessory 307 is carried out in the light emitting part. The light emitting part is provided on a downward flow path of a game ball to the electric accessory 307 in the game area PE. A game ball can flow down in front of the light emitting part. When a shift control of the electric accessory 307 is carried out, the specific notification is carried out in the light emitting part before shifting to the open state.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there is a ball-entering portion into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which the ball-entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a ball-entering portion in which a game ball cannot or cannot be accepted. and a variable receiving means that can be switched to a second state in which it is difficult for the user to operate the system (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2004-81853

Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the players.

The present invention
a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a ball entry section into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
A first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball-entering portion is permitted or easily permitted, and a second state in which entry of a game ball into the ball-entering portion is restricted or is more difficult to permit than in the first state. and a variable means switchable to
with
In a predetermined case, the variable means is configured to be switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state, so that switching control can be executed,
a first guide means capable of guiding the game ball on the upstream side to the downstream side from the ball entry portion;
a second guide means capable of guiding the game ball guided by the first guide means in the variable means to the downstream side in a state where the variable means is in the second state;
with
At least in a situation where the variable means is in the second state, the front end portion of the end portion of the first guide means on the side of the second guide means is the end portion of the second guide means on the side of the first guide means. It is characterized in that it is configured to be located on the front side of the game machine from the front end of the.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to improve interest.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. Front view of the winning unit. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view along the line AA of FIG. 5; (a) is a front view for explaining how a game ball flows when the electric accessory is closed, and (b) is a front view for explaining how a game ball flows when the electric accessory is open. (a) is a cross-sectional view for explaining how a game ball flows down when the electric accessory is closed, and (b) is a cross-sectional view for explaining how a game ball flows when the electric accessory is open. The front view which shows a light-emitting board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine; Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for winning-fail lottery. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a right/wrong table. Explanatory drawing for explaining a type table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening classification table and a normal figure opening pattern. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control unit; 10 is a flowchart showing winning processing for through. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing in the MPU of the main controller; A flowchart showing a game round control process. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; 5 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing; Flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening/closing process. 5 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support; Flowchart showing normal figure game round control processing. The flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. Flowchart showing normal game state transition processing. The flowchart which shows accessory opening and closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round; A block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various effects. FIG. 3 is a block diagram for explaining a reserved storage area; FIG. The flowchart which shows the variable display control process in MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. Flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation start process. A flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation display control processing in MPU of a production control device. (a) Explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the general pattern game round, (b) A flowchart showing the normal pattern fluctuation start process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating special light emission production|presentation. The flowchart which shows a normal figure fluctuation|variation process. The flowchart which shows the process for support states in MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. Explanatory drawing for explaining a special display effect. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. The front view which shows the winning unit of 2nd Embodiment. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view along the line BB of FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the open state of the electric accessory. (a) is a front view for explaining how a game ball flows when the electric accessory is closed, and (b) is a front view for explaining how a game ball flows when the electric accessory is open. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the second guide portion in the modified example of the second embodiment, and is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the CC line cross section of FIG. 42; The front view which shows the winning unit of 3rd Embodiment. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view along the DD line. (a) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the open state of the electric accessory. The front view which shows the winning unit of 4th Embodiment. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. EE line sectional view of FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the closed state of the electric accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the open state of the electric accessory. (a) is a front view for explaining how a game ball flows when the electric accessory is closed, and (b) is a front view for explaining how a game ball flows when the electric accessory is open. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the normal figure open pattern of 5th Embodiment. Flowchart showing normal game state transition processing in the MPU of the main control device. The flowchart which shows accessory opening and closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round; Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special display effect|presentation of 6th Embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the general pattern opening pattern, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the general pattern opening pattern and the special display effect. A flow chart which shows processing in a support state in MPU of a production control device. 4 is a flowchart showing processing during a standby period; Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates or the like on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility.

The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. It is said that As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. It is considered movable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game machine body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the game machine body 12 cannot be opened. and has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 24 is router-processed to form a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a winning unit 301, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display section 43, a character display section 44, and the like. Also, the winning unit 301 is provided with an upper operating port 303 and a lower operating port 305 . In the present embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to win the upper operating port 303 than to win the lower operating port 305 .

When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 305, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, and 15 game balls are paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 32. is executed, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 305, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the upper operating port 303, four game balls are paid out. is executed.

Incidentally, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to enhance the advantage of the upper working port 303 over the lower working port 305 , it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the upper working port 303 to be larger than the number of payouts related to the lower working port 305 . Conversely, it is preferable to set the number of coins to be dispensed for the lower operating port 305 to be larger than the number of coins to be dispensed for the upper operating port 303 from the viewpoint of merely increasing the advantage of the support state described later. Also, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each operation port 303,305, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the variable winning device 32 to be larger than the number of payouts related to each operation port 303,305.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. - 特許庁The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of nails 38 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out port 37, the game ball entering the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 303, the lower operation port 305 or the through gate 35 is also expressed as a prize.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, a region where the game ball shot to the game region PE can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area that is continuous with the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PE2 which is an area on the left, a right area PE3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PE2 and a right area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

As a first shooting operation, the player operates the shooting handle 54 with an amount of rotation in a first range that is less than the reference amount of rotation. start out. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→left area PE2→lower area PE4. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting handle 54 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, the game is played at the right side of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. Balls flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→right area PE3→lower area PE4. In other words, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 54 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, and the game ball can flow down the right side area PE3. A game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

The upper working port 303 and the lower working port 305 are vertically aligned with the upper working port 303 facing upward. The upper working port 303 opens forward, and the lower working port 305 opens upward. A game ball can reach these upper working openings 303 and lower working openings 305 regardless of whether the player is performing the first shooting operation or the second shooting operation. The upper operating port 303 is provided with an electric accessory 307 for opening and closing the upper operating port 303 . The electric accessory 307 has a closed state (non-accepting state, non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the game ball cannot win in the upper operation port 303, and an open state (accepting state, support state or guide state). The upper operating port 303, the electric accessory 307, and the lower operating port 305 are mounted on the winning unit 301, integrated into one unit as an operating port device, and installed in the lower area PE4 on the game board 24. FIG. Details of the winning unit 301 will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is installed in the lower area PE4 on the game board 24 . In other words, the game ball can reach the variable winning device 32 regardless of whether the player performs the first shooting operation or the second shooting operation. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening/closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win or are difficult to win. It can be switched to an open state. Here, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot win or a special loss win is made. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (eg 15 rounds) as the upper limit, with the elapse of a predetermined time (eg 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (eg 10) as one round. There is a mode to be done.

Two through gates 35 are provided in the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 on the game board 24 with the variable display unit 36 interposed therebetween. That is, when the player performs the first shooting operation, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 provided in the left area PE2, and the player performs the second shooting operation. When the game ball is being played, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 provided in the right side area PE3. Both through gates 35 are configured to allow game balls to pass through, and game balls that have entered the through gates 35 in the game area PE are discharged to the same game area PE as they are. Then, the game ball that has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 then flows down to the lower region PE4. In other words, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the upper operating port 303, the lower operating port 305 and the variable winning device 32. When a winning to the through gate 35 occurs, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35 .

The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.例文帳に追加

A main display portion 43 and a character object display portion 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39 . That is, the main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls can be seen in front of these display portions 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. A part of the above-described general prize winning opening 31 is installed on the front surface of the decorative member 39 so as to be open upward.

When the variable prize winning device 32 enters the opening/closing execution mode (or when the variable prize winning device 32 enters the opening/closing execution mode) due to the winning of the jackpot, the main display unit 43 displays the big prize winning opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode. A round display part RS for indicating the number of times that is opened, a first result display part AS for indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the lower operation opening 305, and the upper operation opening 303 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the prize.

In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the display is finished when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

In the first result display unit AS, the winning at the lower working port 305 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 305 is performed. The results are clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operation port 305 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit AS displays the predetermined stop result and fluctuates the display. is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. It should be noted that the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the lower operation port 305 may be referred to as a first special symbol or a first special symbol.

In the second result display section BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working port 303 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 303 is performed. The results are clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 303 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section BS displays the predetermined stop result and fluctuates the display. is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. In addition, it may be referred to as a second special symbol or a second special symbol which is variably displayed when the ball enters the upper working port 303 .

Here, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 305, 303, the corresponding result display units AS, BS start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. It corresponds to one game time. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display section, the variable display is started in the single result display section, and the game cycle is continued until the variable display is stopped while a predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

The character item display section 44 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the character object display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. The result of is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the display part 44 for the accessory and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 307 provided in the lower operation opening 305 is opened in a predetermined manner. It should be noted that the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the through gate 35 may be referred to as a normal pattern or a normal pattern.

Here, based on the winning to the through gate 35, the variable display is started in the character object display unit 44, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round in . Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the game rounds in the result display portions AS and BS, the game rounds in the accessory display portion 44 are also referred to as normal figure game rounds. The times are also called special game times (first special game times, second special game times).

Although the main display unit 43 and character object display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, they are not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. good too.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of patterns. A center frame 42 is arranged in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the pattern display device 41 . The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the pattern display device 41, and the configuration is such that the visibility of the display screen is not lowered due to the game ball falling. .

The pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. On the pattern display device 41, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operation opening 303 or the lower operation opening 305 . That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display section AS, the pattern display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display section BS, the variable display is performed accordingly. At the same time, a variable display is performed on the pattern display device 41 . Then, for example, in the opening/closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is preset in the game turn to shift to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened 15 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the variable display of the special symbol game times corresponding to the result display units AS and BS, but also the variable display of the normal symbol game times corresponding to the character object display unit 44 are performed. Then, the position and size of the area of the variable display on the display screen, the variable pattern, etc. are set differently for the special game round and the normal game round, and the variable display for the special game round and the regular game round It is visually identifiable from the variable display of times. These areas, etc. where the special figure game times and the normal figure game times are performed will be described in detail later.

A first holding light emitting section 45 corresponding to the first result display section AS and the pattern display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42 . The number of winning game balls in the lower operation port 305 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first reservation light emitting section 45. - 特許庁A second holding light emitting section 46 corresponding to the second result display section BS and the pattern display device 41 is provided on the upper right portion of the front side of the center frame 42 . The number of winning game balls in the upper operation port 303 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting of the second reservation light emitting section 46.例文帳に追加As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding light-emitting unit 45 and the second holding light-emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the falling game balls. ing.

A third holding light-emitting portion 47 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided at the lower portion of the center frame 42 . The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the third reservation light emitting part 47.例文帳に追加

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24. The inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute a guide rail, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball shooting mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, as shown in FIG. action is performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 through which substantially the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 61 . A display light emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various light emitting portions. Speaker units 64 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light-emitting unit 63 to output sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65 , and a lower plate 72 that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66 . The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 53 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 . Game balls put out from the putout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper tray 71 and the lower tray 72 through the passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 .

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the board box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated from each other. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The performance control device 82 is provided with a performance control board that controls a display control device (not shown) as well as voice and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 81. The performance control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 and configured.

The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, as shown in FIG. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . The payout mechanism 92 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a game is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body 12 of the game machine is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The controller assembly unit 93 comprises a payout controller 97 and a power supply and launch controller 98 . The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 54 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Regarding the winning unit 301>
Next, the winning unit 301 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the prize winning unit 301, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the prize winning unit 301 as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 7 is a sectional view along the line AA of FIG. 5, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view for explaining how game balls flow down, and FIG. 10 is a front view showing a light emitting substrate.

As shown in FIG. 5, the game board 24 has a pair of left and right first and second game nails (so-called navel nails) 281 provided at the same height position below the variable display unit 36 (see FIG. 4). , 282, and third and fourth game nails (so-called jump nails) 283, 284 provided on the left and right sides of the first and second game nails 281, 282 are arranged. The winning unit 301 is arranged so as to be positioned below the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284. As shown in FIG.

A first light emitting section 311 is provided in the upper part of the prize winning unit 301, an upper prize winning section 313 is provided in the central part, and a lower prize winning section 315 is provided in the lower part. Further, second light emitting portions 317 are provided on both left and right sides of the winning unit 301 . The first light emitting portion 311 , the upper winning portion 313 , the lower winning portion 315 and the second light emitting portion 317 are provided with respect to the base body 320 .

The base body 320 is made of synthetic resin such as ABS resin. The base body 320 is made opaque by being made of an opaque member or by subjecting its surface to metal plating. The base body 320 includes a plate-like base portion 321 having a plate-like shape, and a portion of the base body 320 that protrudes in the thickness direction is integrally formed with the plate-like base portion 321 . As shown in FIG. 7, the front surface 321a of the plate-like base portion 321 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L1 from the window panel 62 is longer than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball can flow down in front of the plate-shaped base portion 321 .

Here, the prize winning unit 301 has a configuration as an operation opening device including the upper prize winning portion 313 and the lower prize winning portion 315, a configuration as an illumination device including the first and second light emitting portions 311 and 317, and the first light emitting portion 311. and a configuration as a game ball guide device by the upper prize winning section 313 . Hereinafter, each configuration will be described in order.

<Regarding the structure of the upper winning portion 313 and the lower winning portion 315 as an operation port device>
As shown in FIG. 5 , the upper winning portion 313 includes an upper operation opening 303 and an opening/closing member 331 as an electric accessory 307 for opening and closing the upper operation opening 303 .

The upper working port 303 opens forward and has a horizontally long, substantially rectangular shape. An opening/closing member 331 is arranged so as to cover the upper working port 303 from the front (see FIG. 7). The opening/closing member 331 is formed in a plate shape and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The lateral width (dimension in the longitudinal direction) of the opening/closing member 331 is set to be approximately the same as the distance between the third game nail 283 and the fourth game nail 284. length is set. On the other hand, the vertical width (dimension in the lateral direction) of the opening/closing member 331 is set slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The upper operating port 303 and the opening/closing member 331 are positioned below the first to fourth game nails 281-284. Specifically, one of the right and left end portions of the opening/closing member 331 is positioned directly below the third game nail 283 and the other is positioned directly below the fourth game nail 284 .

The opening/closing member 331 is held by the base body 320 so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the game board 24). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the lower end portion 331a of the opening/closing member 331 is rotatably supported and is rotatable about the lower end portion 331a. Then, by rotating back and forth around the lower end portion 331a, the game board 24 (plate-like base portion 321) is prevented from protruding from the front surface, and the closed position (second position) covering the upper operation opening 303 and the game board. 24 (plate-shaped base portion 321), and can be displaced to an open position (first position) in which the upper operation port 303 is opened by protruding forward from the front surface 321a.

The front surface 331b of the opening/closing member 331 is substantially flush with the front surface 321a of the plate-like base portion 321 in the closed position (upright posture), so that a step between the plate-like base portion 321 and the plate-like base portion 321 is minimized. It is configured. As a result, not only is it possible for the game ball to pass in front of the opening/closing member 331, but it is also possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the boundary between the plate-like base portion 321 and the opening/closing member 331, thereby allowing the game ball to flow smoothly. is ensured.

As shown in FIG. 6 , an electric accessory drive section 332 for driving an opening/closing member 331 is attached to the back side of the base body 320 . The electric accessory drive section 332 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as a drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force from the solenoid to the opening/closing member 331 . The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . By driving the solenoid, the opening/closing member 331 rotates from the closed position to the open position, and switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 81 stops, the opening/closing member 331 is rotated from the open position to the closed position by the biasing force of the biasing means (such as a spring), thereby switching from the open state to the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 7, the base body 320 is formed with an upper guide passage 333 that guides the game ball entering the upper operation opening 303 to the back side of the game board 24 . The upper guide passage 333 extends rearward, and the game ball reaching the upper guide passage 333 is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 333a. A detection sensor for detecting a game ball entered into the upper operation port 303 is arranged in the middle position. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main controller 81, and predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main controller 81 when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor. there is Based on this detection information, the main controller 81 determines whether or not there is a winning to the upper operation opening 303 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the lower prize winning portion 315 includes a lower operation opening case 337, and the lower operation opening 305 is configured by opening the lower operation opening case 337 upward. The lower operating port case 337 is arranged near the opening/closing member 331 below the upper winning portion 313 . The lower operation port case 337 protrudes forward from the front surface 321a of the plate-shaped base portion 321, as shown in FIG. The lateral width (that is, the lateral width of the lower operating port 305) and the front-rear width (that is, the front-rear width of the lower operating port 305) at the upper side of the lower operating port case 337 are slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. can enter the lower operation port 305 one by one.

As shown in FIG. 5, the lower operating port case 337 is located below the first and second game nails 281,282. Specifically, one of the left and right ends of the lower operating port case 337 (lower operating port 305 ) is positioned directly below the first game nail 281 and the other is positioned directly below the second game nail 282 .

As shown in FIG. 7, the base body 320 is formed with a lower guide passage 339 that guides the game ball that has entered the lower operation opening 305 to the back side of the game board 24 . The lower guide passage 339 extends rearward, and the game ball reaching the lower guide passage 339 is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 339a. A detection sensor for detecting a game ball entered into the lower operation opening 305 is arranged in the middle position. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main controller 81, and predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main controller 81 when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor. there is Based on this detection information, the main controller 81 determines whether or not there is a winning to the lower operation opening 305 .

In the above configuration, the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281 and 282 flows down the first flow path R1 toward the lower operation port 305, as shown in FIG. 8(a). When the opening/closing member 331 is positioned above the lower operating port 305 and both are arranged vertically, when the opening/closing member 331 is in the closed state, the opening/closing member 331 is removed from the first flow-down path R1. By retreating (see FIG. 9(a)), the game ball can pass in front of the opening/closing member 331 and enter the lower operation opening 305. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the game ball that has passed between the first and third game nails 281, 283 and the game ball that has passed between the second and fourth game nails 282, 284 are located on the second and third flow-down paths R2, respectively. , R3. However, these game balls pass through the side of the lower operation opening case 337 without entering the lower operation opening 305 and reach the out opening 37 (see FIG. 5).

As shown in FIGS. 8(b) and 9(b), when the opening/closing member 331 rotates (tilts) forward from the closed position and is displaced to the open position, the game ball can be received into the upper operation opening 303. A region RA is formed on the first downstream route R1. That is, the opening/closing member 331 crosses the first flow path R1 (the opening/closing member 331 is positioned on the first flow path R1) at the same time when the upper operation port 303 is opened. In this case, the opening/closing member 331 receives the game ball flowing down the first flow-down path R1 on the back surface 331c and guides it to the upper operation port 303. Therefore, the game ball that flows down the first flow-down route R1 enters the upper working port 303 before reaching the lower working port 305.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the receiving area RA is also formed on the second and third flow-down routes R2, R3, game balls flowing down the second and third flow-down routes R2, R3 also enter the upper working port 303. That is, not only the first flow-down path R1, but also the game balls that flow down the left and right sides thereof can win the upper operation opening 303.例文帳に追加

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 331 is positioned above the lower operation port 305, and both are arranged adjacent to each other. When opened, the opening/closing member 331 closes the lower operating port 305 at the same time as the upper operating port 303 is opened. Specifically, the opening/closing member 331 displaced to the open position covers the lower operation opening 305 from above. As a result, the game aiming at winning the lower operation port 305 and the game aiming at winning the upper operation port 303 can be clearly separated from the player's eyes. As a result, when the opening/closing member 331 is switched to the open state, the player is prevented from being distracted by the lower actuation opening 305, and the player can be effectively made to pay attention to the electric accessory 307 and the upper actuation opening 303. be possible.

<Regarding the configuration of the illumination device by the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317>
As shown in FIG. 5, the first light-emitting portion 311 is provided with a translucent portion 341 having optical transparency. The translucent portion 341 is arranged near the opening/closing member 331 above the upper winning portion 313 . The translucent part 341 is made of synthetic resin having transparency, and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The lateral width of the translucent portion 341 is set to be approximately the same as the lateral width of the opening/closing member 331, in other words, it is set to have a length corresponding to about three game balls. The vertical width of the translucent part 341 is the size of about two game balls.

As shown in FIG. 7 , the translucent portion 341 has a front surface 341 a substantially flush with the front surface 321 a of the plate-like base portion 321 . That is, the distance L2 to the window panel 62 is longer than one game ball. Therefore, each game ball flowing down the first to third flow-down paths R1-R3 can flow down in front of the translucent portion 341. FIG. A front surface 341a of the translucent portion 341 is formed flat in order to prevent disturbance of the flow of game balls on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3.

Note that the entire front surface 341a may not be flat, and at least the regions overlapping the first to third flow-down routes R1 to R3 may be flat. Further, the translucent portion 341 does not necessarily have to be formed from a single member, and the translucent portion 341 may be configured by stacking a plurality of translucent members in the front-rear direction. In this case, it is preferable that the front surface of the frontmost translucent member is flat.

As shown in FIG. 6 , the second light emitting portion 317 is provided with a projecting portion 347 projecting forward from the front surface 321 a of the plate-like base portion 321 . Each projecting portion 347 is made of a transparent synthetic resin. Each projecting portion 347 is arranged in the vicinity of the light transmitting portion 341 on both left and right sides of the light transmitting portion 341 and extends linearly in the vertical direction so as to straddle the light transmitting portion 341 and the upper winning portion 313 . As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, each projecting portion 347 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view, and the projecting amount (front-to-rear width) is larger than one game ball. A front surface 347a of each protrusion 347 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L3 from the window panel 62 is smaller than one game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 10, behind the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347, a light diffusion plate 357 (light guide plate) and a light emitting substrate 359 on which a plurality of light emitters 360 (specifically, LEDs) are mounted. and are placed.

The light diffusing plate 357 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the surface of the light diffusion plate 357 is subjected to matte processing (frosted glass processing) or uneven processing. By providing the light diffusing plate 357, the light passing through the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347 is dispersed in multiple directions so that the opposite side is not clearly visible. That is, the light diffusion plate 357 not only diffuses the light from the light emitting body 360 but also plays a role of making the light emitting substrate 359 and the light emitting body 360 invisible or invisible when viewed from the front. there is

The light emitting board 359 is arranged so that the mounting surface of the light emitter 360 faces the front of the game machine. Each light emitter 360 is arranged so as to be positioned behind the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347, and is arranged so that the light emitting surface faces forward. The light emitted from each light emitter 360 is diffused by the light diffusion plate 357 and then enters the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347 . As shown in FIG. 7, the rear surface 341b of the translucent portion 341 and the rear surface of the projecting portion 347 are subjected to a predetermined cutting process for light diffusion to form unevenness. Therefore, the light incident on the translucent portion 341 and the protruding portion 347 is further diffused by the unevenness, and then transmitted through the translucent portion 341 and the protruding portion 347 and emitted forward. As a result, it is possible to make the entire area of the translucent portion 341 and the projecting portion 347 emit light.

When the light-transmitting portion 341 is composed of a laminated structure of a plurality of light-transmitting members, the unevenness may be formed on the back surface of the frontmost light-transmitting member, or may be formed on the second and subsequent transparent members from the front. It may be formed on the front or back surface of the optical member.

The light emitting board 359 is electrically connected to the effect control device 82 . Light emission control is performed by the effect control device 82 according to the game situation, so that the light emission effect corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the opening/closing member 331 is executed. The details of the lighting effect will be described later.

<Construction as a guide device by the first light emitting unit 311 and the upper prize winning unit 313>
As shown in FIG. 6, the front surface 341a of the translucent part 341 is provided with two first guide parts 365 capable of guiding game balls flowing down in front of the translucent part 341. As shown in FIG. Each first guide portion 365 protrudes forward from the front surface 341a of the translucent portion 341 and has a plate shape. These first guide portions 365 are formed integrally with the translucent portion 341 and have the same optical transparency as the translucent portion 341 .

Each first guide portion 365 extends vertically with the same length, and specifically, extends linearly from the upper end to the lower end of the translucent portion 341 . As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, each first guide portion 365 has a vertically long substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and its projection amount (front-to-rear width) is larger than that of one game ball. . The front surface 365a of each first guide portion 365 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L4 from the window panel 62 is smaller than one game ball.

As shown in FIG. 8, these first guides 365 are arranged in parallel with an interval that allows one game ball to pass therethrough, and are located directly below the game nails 281 and 282, respectively. The distance L5 between the upper surface 365b of each first guide portion 365 and each game nail 281, 282 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, as shown in FIG. As a result, only the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281 and 282 can pass through the first flow-down route R1.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the front surface 331b of the opening/closing member 331 of the upper winning portion 313 is provided with two second guide portions 371 capable of guiding game balls flowing down in front of the opening/closing member 331. . Each second guide portion 371 protrudes forward from the front surface 331b of the opening/closing member 331 and has a plate shape. These second guide portions 371 are formed integrally with the opening/closing member 331 .

Each of the second guide portions 371 extends vertically with the same length, and more specifically, extends linearly from the upper end of the opening/closing member 331 to its midway position. These second guide portions 371 are arranged continuously from each first guide portion 365 . More specifically, the second guide portion 371 and the first guide portion 365 are arranged such that their center axes in the left-right direction are aligned, and are aligned in a straight line when viewed from the front. The thickness (lateral width) of each second guide portion 371 is substantially the same as that of each first guide portion 365 .

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 8, the game ball passing between the first and second game pegs 281 and 282 is defined downward in the first and second guide portions 365 and 371 respectively. be. When the opening/closing member 331 is closed, the game ball is guided to the lower operation opening 305 by both the first and second guide portions 365 and 371, as shown in FIG. 8(a). . On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 331 is switched to the open state, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the game ball is guided to the rear surface 331c (ball receiving surface) of the opening/closing member 331 by the first guide portion 365. be.

In this way, by guiding the game ball after passing through the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284 by the first guide part 365 and the second guide part 371, the game ball can be played in front of the translucent part 341 and the opening/closing member 331. It is suppressed that the ball rampages. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excessive decrease in the winning probability to the lower operation opening 305 and the upper operation opening 303, and to reassure the player. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the light emitting effect in the light transmitting portion 341 due to the influence of the game ball flowing down in front of the light transmitting portion 341 . In addition, since the guide path of the game ball is clearly indicated by the first and second guide parts 365 and 371, the game ball can easily enter the lower operation opening 305 and the upper operation opening 303 from the appearance ( It is possible to give the impression that the player is easily guided, and it also leads to an improvement in the desire to play.

By the way, due to the projecting portion 347 of the second light emitting portion 317 being erected, the distance between the first game nail 281 and the third game nail 283 and between the second game nail 282 and the fourth game nail 284 Each game ball that has passed through is also guided to the upper working port 303 . Furthermore, due to the presence of the protruding portion 347, entry of game balls from the sides into the first to third flow-down paths R1 to R3 is suppressed. As a result, another game ball collides with the game ball on the first to third flow-down paths R1 to R3 from the side, and the game ball is repelled outside the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 305. suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 7, each second guide portion 371 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view, and its projection amount (front-rear width) is smaller than that of each first guide portion 365. there is Since each second guide part 371 is displaced with the rotation of the opening/closing member 331, the collision of each second guide part 371 with the window panel 62 is avoided by suppressing the amount of protrusion of each second guide part 371 to be small. It is As a result, damage to the second guide portions 371 and the window panel 62 due to the displacement of the opening/closing member 331 is suppressed. In order to avoid collision with the window panel 62, the amount of protrusion of each second guide portion 371 is in balance with the height position of each second guide portion 371 with respect to the opening/closing member 331, the rotation angle of the opening/closing member 331, and the like. However, from the viewpoint of guiding the game ball, it is preferable that it is equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball.

A distance L6 between the upper surface 371a (upper end) of the second guide portion 371 and the lower surface 365c (lower end) of the first guide portion 365 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, the game ball flowing down the first flow-down route R1 is suppressed from moving to the other flow-down routes R2, R3 through between the first guide portion 365 and the second guide portion 371. Thereby, it becomes possible to properly guide the game ball on the first flow-down route R1 to the lower operation port 305 .

Furthermore, since the distance L6 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the first guide part 365 functions as a suppressing means for suppressing collision of the game ball from above against the upper surface 371a of the second guide part 371. be able to. The opening/closing member 331 is configured to open the upper operation opening 303 by rotating forward from the closed position (upright posture). There is a concern that the opening/closing member 331 may be rotated forward by the impact, and the upper operation opening 303 may be opened regardless of the switching control. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the upper working hole 303 against the game design, and the game hall may suffer a loss. In this regard, since the first guide portion 365 functions as a suppressing means, the unexpected opening of the opening/closing member 331 is suppressed, and the above inconvenience can be solved favorably.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the amount of projection of the second guide portion 371 is smaller than that of the first guide portion 365, the first guide portion 365 extends the entire upper surface of the second guide portion 371 from above. It becomes a covering mode, and the collision of the game ball from above is further suppressed. It should be noted that the thickness (lateral width) of the first guide portion 365 may be made larger than that of the second guide portion 371 in terms of functioning as suppressing means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the distance L7 between the lower surface 371b (lower end) of the second guide portion 371 and the lower working port 305 (upper end of the lower working port case 337) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. . With such a configuration, the game ball flowing down the first flow-down route R1 can move sideways through the gap between the second guide portion 371 and the lower operation port 305 and deviate from the first flow-down route R1. As a result, the game ball passing between the first and second game nails 281, 282 is prevented from always entering the lower operation opening 305, suppressing the monotony of the game, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous. It is possible to maintain the player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball that has passed through.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main controller 81 . The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main controller 81, a payout controller 97, various detection sensors 211, and the like. In this case, the power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205 , and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205 . In addition, as part of the various detection sensors 211, it is provided in the winning corresponding ball entering portion (payout corresponding ball entering portion) such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303, the lower operating port 305, and the through gate 35. A plurality of detection sensors are connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81 makes a prize winning determination (ball entering determination) for each ball entering portion. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot generating lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305, and executes the support generating lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35. - 特許庁

A power outage monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97 and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU202. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of game balls is output, and when the winning to the lower operation port 305 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and to the upper operation port 303 , a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

In the production control device 82, various production commands for special figures such as variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, opening commands and ending commands related to special game times, variation commands and type commands related to normal game times , variation end command, opening command and ending command, etc. are output. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning driving unit 32c for opening and closing the open/close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 332 for opening and closing the electric accessory 307 of the upper operation port 303, and a main display unit 43 and a character object display unit 44 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 32c so that the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 307 is won in the open state, the MPU 202 controls the driving of the electric accessory driving unit 332 so that the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed. Further, at each special game round, display control of the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS in the main display portion 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main Display control of the round display portion RS in the display portion 43 is executed. Then, at the time of the normal figure game round, the MOU 202 executes display control of the character object display unit 44, and in the support state in which the electric accessory 307 is elected in the open state, the character object display unit 44 is in the support state. Display control indicating winning is executed.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. Through this external output terminal 99, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections and jackpot information is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information related to the lottery result such as is output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped by the hall computer HC.

The blackout monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control unit 98, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control unit 98, which is a stable 24 volts DC. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 201, the payout control device 97 and the like are generated with operating power required for each, and the generated operating power is supplied. Also, the power supply and shooting control device 98 is responsible for the shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

Effect control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, each of the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display light emitting unit 63 provided in the front door frame 14 and the winning unit It drives and controls the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 and the speaker unit 64 provided in 301 and controls the display control device 212 .

The display control device 212 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command input from the effect control device 82 . In this case, the effect control device 82 determines, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the variable display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. A lottery is executed for the presence or absence of reach generation and the content of reach performance.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 shows a display screen G of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbols, upper, middle and lower, are displayed in the approximate center of the display screen G as a variable display area for special game times. Columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the display screen G is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It is designed to be

In addition, the display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a jackpot animation is displayed as the occurrence of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot result, or the 15R probability variable jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variable jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols appears stopped. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. be.

The pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate.

A first holding display area Ga corresponding to the first holding light emitting unit 45 is set on the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, and a first holding display area Ga corresponding to the second holding light emitting part 46 is set on the right side of the lower part of the display screen G. A second reserved display area Gb is set.

In the first reservation display area (non-priority side reservation display area) Ga, the same number of unit reservation display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 305 are arranged in the horizontal direction. It is divided and displayed as follows. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved when the game ball has won the lower operation opening 305 is four, corresponding to the first reserved display area Ga, the first unit reserved display area Ga1, the second A unit reserved display area Ga2, a third unit reserved display area Ga3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 305 and the number of reservations is 1, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball enters the lower operation opening 305 When the number of pending prizes is 4, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Ga1 to the fourth unit pending display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second reservation display area (priority side reservation display area) Gb, the same number of unit reservation display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 303 are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. It is divided and displayed so that it is displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303, the maximum number of reservations is four. A unit reserved display area Gb2, a third unit reserved display area Gb3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 303 is 1, the image for reservation is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the upper operation opening 303 When the number of pending items is four, the pending images are displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Gb1 to the fourth unit pending display area Gb4.

An area that does not overlap with the above-described symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the reserved display areas Ga and Gb on the display screen G, more specifically, in the upper part of the display screen G, a normal figure display area as a variable display area for the general figure game round P is set. The normal figure display area P is composed of a plurality of (two) display portions, and a variable display is possible by switching the display color in each of these display portions. In addition, the general pattern display area P is smaller than the variable display area in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each display portion in the general pattern display area P is smaller than each pattern (main pattern and sub pattern).

The normal figure display area P corresponds to the character object display portion 44, and when the character object display portion 44 performs the variable display, the normal figure display area P also performs the variable display. Then, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is displayed on the character object display unit 44 together with the character object display unit 44 .

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 202 uses various types of counter information to set the jackpot lottery, display settings for the main display section 43, set pattern display settings for the pattern display device 41, set display settings for the accessory display section 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results, A reach random number counter C3 used for a reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 loses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a first result display part AS of the main display part 43 and a second result display section BS and a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. FIG. Furthermore, when determining the opening type in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 is set and the open random number counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the electric accessory 307 of the upper operation port 303 is in the electric role open state The release type counter C5 to be used is used.

Each of the counters C1-C3, CINI, CS1, C4-C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204 . In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is, when a prize is won in the lower operation port 305 or the upper operation port 303, It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as acquired information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first result display section reserved area Ra and a second result display section reserved area Rb, and a first execution area AE1. The reserved areas Ra and Rb respectively include first areas Ra1 and Rb1, second areas Ra2 and Rb2, third areas Ra3 and Rb3, and fourth areas Ra4 and Rb4. In accordance with the winning history, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored as reserved information in any area stored in Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first areas Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth areas Ra4, Rb4, when the winning to the lower working opening 305 or the upper working opening 303 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area Ra1, Rb1 → the third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of 2 areas Ra2, Rb2→3rd areas Ra3, Rb3→4th areas Ra4, Rb4. Since four areas are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303 are reserved and stored. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 232, and in the total reservation number storage area, the number of holding and storing the winning history to the lower operation opening 305 or the upper operation opening 303 is specified. Information for doing is stored.

The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the reservation areas Ra and Rb when starting the variable display on the main display section 43. At the start of the illustrated game round, win/loss determination and the like are performed based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 305 or the upper operation opening 303. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305, and the second result display portion of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 221 as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 203 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, as the success/failure table for the special figure, the success/failure table for the special figure (low-probability success/failure information group) for the low-probability mode of FIG. 14(a) and the high-probability A special figure propriety table for the mode (high probability propriety information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the special figure, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery results are usually lost except for the random number values that result in winning the jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are based on two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning/failure lottery means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode; A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 307 of the upper operating port 303, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the electric accessory 307 of the upper operating port 303 Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time is relatively high or low ) are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role item open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 307 is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 307 occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It is

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operation port 303 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower working port 305 is higher than the upper working port 303, but in the high-frequency support mode, the upper working port 303 is more likely to win than the lower working port 305. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is awarded to the upper operation port 303, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays while not reducing the number of balls he has. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by changing any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305, and the second result display portion of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a type table (distribution information group) in a type table storage area 222 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203 .

In this embodiment, as the types of jackpot results, a normal jackpot result and a probability variable jackpot result are set. The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery results in the win/fail lottery result in winning the big win state and the game shifts to the big win state accordingly.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state refers to a state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the type table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 15A, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result. , "40 to 89" corresponds to the 6R probability variable jackpot result, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

On the other hand, in the type table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 15(b), only 6R normal jackpot results and 15R probability variable jackpot results are set as game result distribution destinations. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" correspond to the 6R normal jackpot results, and "40 to 99" correspond to the 15R probability variable jackpot results.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the mode of distributing the game results in the case of winning a jackpot is the case of winning a jackpot based on the winning at the upper operating port 303 and the winning at the lower operating port 305. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same regardless of whether the type table for the first result display section or the type table for the second result display section is selected. That is, in the type table for the first result display section, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 6R probability variable jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result is 60 pieces. Further, in the type table for the second result display section, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variable jackpot result is 60 pieces. Therefore, the probability that the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is that the jackpot win is won based on the winning at the lower operating port 305 and the jackpot winning based on the winning at the upper operating port 303. It is the same as the case where it becomes (specifically 60%).

However, when a jackpot is won based on the winning to the upper operating port 303 and a probability variable jackpot result occurs, the result is always a 15R probability variable jackpot result, whereas a jackpot winning is based on the winning to the lower operating port 305 and In the case of a probability variable jackpot result, there is a 50% probability of a 6R probability variable jackpot result, and a 10% probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot result. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variable jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variable jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot is won based on the winning to the upper operation port 303. It will be higher than when a jackpot is won based on the winning prize.

As described above, there is a clear difference in advantages for the player between the lower activation port 305 and the upper activation port 303 . Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the upper operation port 303 of the lower operation port 305 and the upper operation port 303 will win a prize. The degree of attention of the player to the high-frequency support mode in which .

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the lower working opening 305 or the upper working opening 303. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305, and the second result display portion of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303. is stored in the reservation area Rb. Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203 . However, in the special game times to shift to the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 202 determines reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the open/close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the special game round, the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result. It is a display state that makes the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display before the derived display.

In other words, a combination of ready-to-win symbols with a possibility of establishing a combination of jackpot symbols by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying a combination of ready-to-win patterns that have the possibility of being hit, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 12 will be described. First, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are started to be displayed at high speed. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern is displayed. After that, the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display in which the player can easily recognize the displayed symbols. Then, when the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stop-displaying main symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Then, when the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display and the open/close execution mode occurs, the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are attached. is stop-displayed on the reach line, and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is ended.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform production, and those that perform ready-to-win production by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after displaying a combination of ready-to-win symbols in a reduced size or not. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS of the main display portion 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. be done. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 305 or the upper operation opening 303. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305, and the second result display portion of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is stored in the electric worker holding area 233 as the acquired information storage means on the general map side when winning to the through gate 35 occurs. Stored.

The electrician reservation area 233 includes an electrician reservation area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for normal maps. The reservation area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4. Numerical information of the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is stored in one of the areas as reserved information.

In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, when winning to the through gate 35 occurs multiple times in a row, the first area Rc1→second area Rc2→third area Rc3→fourth area Each numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Rc4. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The second execution area AE2 for the normal figure is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the reservation area Rc when starting the variable display of the character object display unit 44. At the start of the normal game round, open determination and the like are performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

For details about each counter on the general map side, the open random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric work holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a general drawing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 307 to the open state based on the stored value of the open random number counter C4.

The value of the random number that becomes the support state winning in the general-purpose lottery is stored in the success/failure table storage area 221 as the success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 203 as the success/failure table for the general-purpose pattern. As already explained, in the normal drawing lottery, the probability of being in the support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the support mode high or low, and the normal drawing success/failure table stored in the ROM 203 I am using a common table. For example, as shown in FIG. 14(c), if the open random number counter C4=0 to 99 in the normal figure right/wrong table, the electric accessary 307 is shifted to the support state to control the open state, and C4=100. If it is ~199, it is set so as not to shift to the support state without controlling the electric accessory 307 to the open state.

Here, as a mode of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the support state, the frequency of occurrence of winning of the electric accessory 307 from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high or low. A high winning support state and a low winning support state are set. Furthermore, two types of high prize support states, a first high prize support state and a second high prize support state, are set.

Specifically, in the first high winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is continued until 3 sec elapses or the electric accessory 307 (upper This is continued until the number of prizes entered into the operation port 303) reaches five. In addition, in the second high winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state. This is continued until the number of prizes awarded to the mouth 303) reaches 10. Incidentally, in the second high winning support state, the closing period (standby period) between the first opening and the second opening is set to 0.2 sec.

In the low winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is continued until 0.2 sec elapses or to the electric accessory 307 (upper operation port 303). This is continued until the number of winning prizes reaches 3.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 53 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. is driven and controlled. On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 307 once is 0.2 sec as described above. In other words, in the low prize winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 307 is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the support state related to the low winning support state, substantially no winning of game balls occurs.

In the high prize support state and the low prize support state, the number of openings and closings of the electric accessory 307, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high prize support state than in the low prize support state. However, the value is not limited to the above value and can be any value as long as the frequency of winning to the upper operation port 303 increases from the start to the end of the support state. Specifically, if the number of times of opening and closing is greater in the high winning support state than in the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high prize support state and the low prize support state, in the support state related to the low prize support state, substantially no prizes are awarded to the upper operation port 303. should be For example, in the high winning support state, the product of the firing period of the game ball and the maximum number of openings is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low winning support state, one opening is: The product of the game ball launch period and the open limit number may be set longer than the open limit time. Also, even if the shooting interval of the game ball and the opening time of the upper operation port 303 once are not the above, in the low prize winning support state, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which winning to the upper operation port 303 does not occur substantially.

The distribution destination of the game result for the open type counter C5 is stored as a type table (distribution information group) in the type table storage area 222 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203 . Here, the contents of the classification table for general-purpose maps will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . As shown in FIG. 16, the general map type table in the low frequency support mode of FIG. 16(a) is set as the general map type table.

As shown in FIG. 16( a ), as a distribution destination for general figure winning, in the general figure classification table in the low frequency support mode, the first release result (first support result) and the second release result (first 2 support result) is set. The first release result is a distribution result that results in a low prize winning support state, and the second release result is a distribution result that results in a first high prize winning support state. In the normal map type table in the low frequency support mode, among the values of the open type counter C5 of "0 to 99", "0 to 89" corresponds to the first open result, and "90 to 99" It corresponds to the second release result. In other words, when the result of the general figure winning lottery in the low frequency support mode is the result of shifting to the support state, 90% of them will shift to the low prize support state, and the remaining 10% will be the first high prize support state. transition to

On the other hand, the mode of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the high frequency support mode is only the second high winning support state, as shown in FIG. 16(b). In other words, when the result of the normal game win-or-fail lottery in the high-frequency support mode results in a shift to the support state, the state always shifts to the second high winning support state.

As already explained, the MPU 202 determines the fluctuation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first execution area AE1. However, the special figure variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination. Also, in the MPU 202, using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1, the stop result in the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS is determined. However, the special figure stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 in advancing the game in each game cycle will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 202 executes main processing that is activated upon power-on and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 81, determines the states of the detection sensors (detection information from the detection sensors), and saves the detection information (winning detection information). For example, when it is determined that a ball has entered the lower working opening 305, the winning detection flag for the lower working opening is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and the ball has entered the upper working opening 303. When it is determined that it has, a prize winning detection flag for the upper operation port is stored in the same various flag storage area 235 . Also, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 , a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 .

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4, and the open type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the maximum value, they are reset to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the winning process for through will be described later.

After that, in step S105, after executing the prize winning process for the operation port, this timer interrupt process is terminated. In the prize winning process for the operating port, based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the operating ports 305, 303, a prize ball command for paying out the game ball is set based on the winning, and a jackpot random number counter is set. Information acquisition processing for storing each value of C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and variation type counter CS is performed.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 18, the winning process for through will be described.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (entered) the through gate 35 by confirming whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. When the game ball has not won the through gate 35, the main winning process is terminated as it is. When the through gate 35 has won, in step S202, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal that the game ball has won the through gate 35 to the management control device on the game hall side.

In step S203, the value stored in the number of pending information storage area for storing the number of pending information in the electrician's pending area Rc is read, and the normal diagram showing the number of pending information stored in the electrician's pending area Rc is read. It is determined whether or not the reserved memory number FN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). When the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is the upper limit value, the main winning process is terminated as it is, and when it is less than the upper limit value, the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is increased by 1 (incremented) in step S204. Then, in step S205, a process of storing the values of the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is performed, and the prize winning process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S301 to S306 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S309 and S310 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S301. In the external signal output process of step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . Moreover, when the command for production|presentation is set, it is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S302, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In subsequent step S303, a game round control process for controlling the game in each special game round is executed. In this game round control processing, determination of a big hit on the side of special symbols, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display section 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S303, it progresses to step S304 and executes a game state transition process. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this game state transition processing.

In the subsequent step S305, an electric supporting process for controlling the game in the normal side game round is executed. In this electric role support processing, the support judgment on the normal figure side, the setting of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display device 41, the display control of the accessory display unit 44, the electric accessory 307 provided in the upper working port 303 Drive control, etc.

These steps S303 to S305 will be described later in detail.

Thereafter, in step S306, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In subsequent step S307, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 204. FIG. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when power failure occurrence is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 205 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 202, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204 . Further, in step S310, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, similarly to step S302, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the game round control process of step S303 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 20 to 22 and the like.

In the game round control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored in the opening/closing execution mode flag storage area (opening/closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. do. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S402, that is, the game round start process of steps S403 to S405 and the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409 are not executed. Terminate the turn control process. In other words, when it is in the open/close execution mode, regardless of whether or not winning to the operation ports 305 and 303 has occurred, the special figure game cycle is not started.

If the open/close execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display section 43 is in variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in the process of variable display. This determination is based on whether or not a variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. It is done by judging. The flag during variable display is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the main display unit 43 is not displaying the variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start processing of steps S403 to S405. In the game round start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the starting pending storage numbers RaN and RbN, is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the lower operation port 305 and the upper operation port 303. FIG. Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is. If the common pending number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb is set for variable display in step S404. After executing the data setting process of step S405 and executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display on the pattern display device 41 in step S405, the game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step S404 and the variation start process in step S405 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first result display section of steps S502 to S507 is executed, and if the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0" executes data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S508 to S513.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is "0". If it is stored, the data stored in the second result display holding area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether the first start holding storage number RaN is 1 or more. made it As a result, when the reservation information is stored in both the first result display section reservation area Ra and the second result display section reservation area Rb, the second result display section reservation area corresponding to the upper operation port 303 is displayed. The hold information stored in area Rb is given priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S502, the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display section holding area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S503, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S504, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1.

After that, in step S505, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of first area Ra1, third area Ra3→second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4→third area Ra3.

In subsequent step S506, the second result display flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased; if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is the start of the current variable display.

In the following step S507, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted is set. . In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, to the lower operation port 305 A special figure shift command including information of correspondence is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.例文帳に追加After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S507 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the production control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the first reservation light emitting part 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first reservation display area Ga of the pattern display device 41 are reduced. Execute processing for changing corresponding to.

In the data setting process for the second result display portion, first, in step S508, the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion holding area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S509, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S510, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display section reservation area Rb is moved to the first execution area AE1.

After that, in step S511, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display portion reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of first area Rb1, third area Rb3→second area Rb2, fourth area Rb4→third area Rb3.

In subsequent step S512, the second result display flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is not stored, the second result display flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the following step S513, set a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. . In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second result display section reservation area Rb, that is, the upper operation port 303 A special figure shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. - 特許庁After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S513 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the production control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the second reservation light emitting part 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second reservation display area Gb of the pattern display device 41 are reduced. Execute processing for changing corresponding to.

Next, fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not a high-probability mode flag (high-probability state information) is stored in a high-probability mode flag storage area (high-probability state information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. determine whether The high-probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to the occurrence of any probability variable jackpot result, and is erased when the normal jackpot result occurs after that.

If the mode is not the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode in step S602. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is the same as the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 14(a). Determine whether or not they match. On the other hand, if it is the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode in step S603. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is the same as the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 14(b). Determine whether or not they match.

After the processing of step S602 or step S603, in step S604 ~ step S612, along with executing the processing for setting the game result of this special figure game round, the first result display in this special figure game round Processing for setting a stop result when ending the variable display executed in either the part AS or the second result display part BS is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S604, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S602 or step S603 is a big hit. When the jackpot is won, in steps S605 to S610, the process for setting the game result and the stop result when the jackpot is won is executed.

In step S605, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores the second result display unit flag. If the second result display section flag is not stored, the classification table for the first result display section (see FIG. 15A) is referred to in step S606 to determine the distribution. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot result, the numerical range of the 6R probability variable jackpot result, and the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result. Determine if the

On the other hand, if the second result display section flag is stored, the classification table for the second result display section (see FIG. 15(b)) is referred to in step S607 to perform allocation determination. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in the numerical range of the 6R normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

After the processing of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, whether the game result distributed in step S606 or step S607 is any of the probability variable jackpot results (either the 6R probability variable jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result) determine whether or not In the case of the probability variable jackpot result, in step S609, in the current special figure game round in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the probability variable jackpot result is displayed. A stopping result setting process for the probability variable jackpot is executed for setting the end of the variable display in the state where the variable is displayed. Also in step S609, information (either 6R probability variation flag or 15R probability variation flag) for specifying by MPU 202 which probability variation jackpot result is the result of this special game round success or failure determination is stored in RAM 204 Stored in the flag storage area 235 .

On the other hand, when the game result sorted in step S606 or step S607 is not the probability variable jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S608, and the process proceeds to step S610. In step S610, the stop result table for the normal jackpot is referred to, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 204. stored in the stop result address storage area. Further, in step S610, the information (normal jackpot flag) for specifying whether the result of the win/fail judgment of the special game round this time is the jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM204.

If the result of the lottery in step S602 or step S603 is not a jackpot winning, a negative determination is made in step S604, and the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the deviation for setting whether to end the variable display in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS in this special figure game round as the result of the deviation Execute the stop result setting process for time.

After executing any of the processing of step S609, step S610, and step S611, in step S612, set the variable display time of the current special figure game round in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS Executes variable display time setting processing for In the variable display time setting process, the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, and the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS is selected from the variable display time table stored in the ROM 203. . In the variable display time table, for each game round of the first and second special symbols, those corresponding to the jackpot winning and those corresponding to the result of losing are set. Thus, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, it is possible to vary the variation display time depending on the game result. As a result, it is possible to diversify the pattern of the variable display time to be set.

In the following step S613, the special figure variation command and the special figure type command are set. The special figure variation command includes information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variation display time. In addition, information of the game result is included in the special figure type command. That is, the special figure type command includes, as information on the game result, information on the 15R probability variable jackpot result, information on the 6R probability variable jackpot result, information on the 6R normal jackpot result, and the like.

The special figure variation command and the special figure type command set in step S613 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the production control device 82, based on the received special figure variation command and special figure type command, the content of the production in the special game round is determined, and various devices are operated so that the content of the decided production is executed. Control. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the pattern on the pattern display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the pattern is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. be. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that the symbols corresponding to each special figure game round are variably displayed.

After that, in step S614, among the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS, the result display portion corresponding to the current special figure game cycle starts the variable display of the pattern. In this case, when the second result display section flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display section corresponding to the special figure game round of this time is specified as the first result display section AS, and the second result display section is specified. When the flag is stored, it specifies that the result display section corresponding to the special figure game round of this time is the second result display section BS. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 20), when the main display unit 43 is in the process of changing display, the game round progressing process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game round progress processing, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the special figure game round of this time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the result display section so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display section related to this special game round (light emission control of each display segment ) to end the game round control process.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S408. In the fluctuation end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of steps S609, S610, and S611 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 22) is specified, and a pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43. The main display section 43 is controlled so as to stop display.

In the following step S409, a special figure fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The special figure fluctuation end command set in step S409 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). Upon receiving the special figure fluctuation end command, the effect control device 82 controls the display controller 212 so as to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of final stop symbols in the special figure game round.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S304 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variable display of the pattern in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS of one special game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

When it is the timing when the variable display ends, in step S703, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current special figure game cycle corresponds to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 6R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204 . If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start process is executed in step S704. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) is set for waiting without starting the opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 .

In the subsequent step S705, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section RS in the main display section 43 . As a result, information on the round related to the output is displayed on the round display section RS.

In the subsequent step S706, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the 15R jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores a 15R probability variation flag. If it is not a 15R jackpot, that is, if it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, in step S707, the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is set to "6". The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the big winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, if it is a 15R jackpot, in step S708, "15" is set in the first round counter area RC1.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, a special figure opening command is set in step S709. This set special figure opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This special figure opening command includes information as to whether it is a 6R normal jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 15R jackpot. A performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received special figure opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time is performed.

In the subsequent step S710, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the 6R probability variation flag, 15R probability variation flag, or normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and if any flag is stored, the external output terminal 99 The signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in is the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

If it is determined in step S701 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S712. Here, the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 32c. When the large winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" in step S802, and the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 are provided in step S803. It is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 received is "0".

If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" or if the value of the first timer area T1 is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer area T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S804 and variable winning drive is performed to open the big winning opening 32a. Let the part 32c be in a driving state.

In the subsequent step S805, "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in order to measure the opening/closing timing of opening/closing the big winning hole 32a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec.

In the subsequent step S806, "10" is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winnings of the game balls into the big winning opening 32a. After that, a special figure opening command is set in step S807, and the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set special figure open command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received open command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step S808 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is "0". If the value of the first timer area T1 is not "0", it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 32a in step S809. If no prize has been won, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the first prize counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step S810, and then in step S811 it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter area PC1 is "0". If it is not "0", the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the first timer area T1 is "0" at step S808, or if the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is "0" at step S811, it means that the conditions for closing the big winning opening are met. means. In such a case, in step S812, the variable prize winning driving section 32c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big prize winning opening 32a.

In subsequent step S813, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step S814, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0", in step S815, "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 as the period for keeping the big winning opening 32a closed. After that, a special figure closing command is set in step S816, and the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set special figure closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S814 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0", ending processing is executed in step S817. In the start process, the waiting time for the ending is set for waiting without starting the next special figure game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 . The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S818, after setting the special figure ending command, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set special figure ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received special figure ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 23), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S712, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" in step S713. At the same time, in step S714, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, then in step S715, transition processing for ending the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode are set. Specifically, when the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, resulting in the normal jackpot result. If there is, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode limited in number of times.

Then, in step S716, the process for ending the display of the round display section RS is executed, and in step S717, after executing the opening/closing execution mode end process, the game state transition process is ended. In the closing process of the opening/closing execution mode, transition to the opening/closing execution mode and erasure of various counters and flags used during the opening/closing execution mode are performed.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the electric role support process, a normal game round control process is executed in step S901, a normal game state transition process is executed in step S902, and this support process ends.

That is, the electrical support process basically has the same processing configuration as the game round control process (FIG. 20) and the game state transition process (FIG. 23) on the special figure side. In other words, the normal pattern game round control process of step S901 corresponds to the special figure side game round control process of FIG. 20, and the normal figure game state transition process of step S902 corresponds to the special figure side game state transition process of FIG. is doing. Hereinafter, the processing of the game round control processing (step S901) and the game state transition processing (step S902) on the normal side will be described in detail.

<Normal map game turn control processing>
First, the normal game round control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the regular game round control process, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not in the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support state flag (support state information) is stored in the support state flag storage area (support state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The support state flag is stored in the case of shifting to the support state for opening and closing control of the electric auditors 307 in the general pattern game state transition processing described later, and when the support state is ended in the general pattern game state transition processing erased to

If it is in the support state, without executing any of the processing after step S1002, that is, the processing for starting the normal game turn in steps S1003 to S1005 and the processing for progressing in the normal game turn in steps S1006 to S1009 , terminates the normal game round control process. That is, when it is in the support state, regardless of whether or not winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the normal game cycle is not started.

If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the character object display unit 44 is in variable display. In this determination, the general pattern fluctuation display flag (second fluctuation display information) is stored in the general pattern fluctuation display flag storage area (second fluctuation display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 ( stored). The normal figure variable display flag is stored when the variable display of the character product display unit 44 is started, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the character object display unit 44 is not in the process of variable display, the process proceeds to the process for starting the normal figure game in steps S1003 to S1005. In the general pattern game turn start processing, first, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the general pattern reservation storage number FN is "0". When the number FN of the normal figure pending storage is "0", the process for electric support is terminated as it is.

If the number FN of the normal map reservation storage is not "0", in step S1004 a normal map data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the electric service reservation area Rc for variable display. In the general pattern data setting process, the general pattern reservation storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service reservation area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. Then, a process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electrician's holding area Rc is executed. That is, this is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 to the lower area side. , third area Rc3→second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4→third area Rc3, and so on. Then, set a normal map shift command (general map shift occurrence information) that is information for making the performance control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area on the general map side has been shifted. do. In this case, the general pattern shift command is read from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the general pattern shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

After executing the general pattern data setting process in step S1004, the general pattern variation start process is executed in step S1005, and then the normal pattern game round control process is terminated.

Here, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27 .

In the normal figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 . As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored in the special figure side game state transition processing, and then erased when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game round continues 100 times).

If it is not the high-frequency support mode, the success/failure determination (support lottery) is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-frequency support mode in step S1102. The pass/fail judgment is performed by referring to the pass/fail table for the frequency support mode. In addition, as already explained, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the support mode is high or low, it is configured to use a common right/wrong table for normal maps. It is the same as the success/failure table referred to by (see FIG. 14(c)). Therefore, the process of determining whether the support mode is high or low in step S1101 may be omitted.

After the processing of step S1102 or step S1103, in step S1104 ~ step S1112, along with executing the processing for setting the game result of the normal figure game round this time, display for the role item in the normal figure game round of this time A process for setting a stop result when ending the variable display executed by the unit 44 is executed. When setting the stop result, among the various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, the stop result table for the normal chart is referenced.

Specifically, first, in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1102 or step S1103 is support state winning. In the case of winning the support state, in steps S1105 to S1111, the processing for setting the game result and the processing for setting the stop result in the case of the support state winning are executed.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores a high frequency support mode flag. When the high-frequency support mode flag is set, in step S1106, it is determined that the second high winning support state will occur as a result of the stoppage of the accessory display unit 44 in the normal game round. A stop result setting process for the second high winning support state is executed for setting to end the variable display in the displayed state. In addition, in step S1106, information (second high winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of winning/failure determination of the normal game round this time is the open result of the second high winning supporting state is stored in the RAM 204. is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of .

On the other hand, if the high-frequency support mode flag is not stored, in step S1107, the general map classification table for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 16(a)) is referred to for allocation determination. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the first unlocking result or the numerical range of the second unlocking result.

At subsequent step S1108, it is determined whether or not the game result sorted at step S1107 is the result of the first high winning support state (second open result). If the result is the first high winning support state, in step S1109, the first high winning support state will occur as a result of stopping the accessory display unit 44 in the normal game round. A stop result setting process for the first high winning support state is executed for setting the end of the variable display in the state where the . Also, in step S1109, the information (first high winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the winning/failure determination result of the normal game round this time is the open result of the first high winning supporting state is stored in the RAM 204 by various Stored in the flag storage area 235 .

In the subsequent step S1110, a first high winning support command is set. This set first high winning support command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect based on the received first high winning support command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S1108 is not the result of the first high winning support state, that is, if the game result distributed is the first open result and the low winning support state, in step S1111, the low A stop result setting process for the low winning support state is executed for setting to end the variable display in a state in which the occurrence of the winning support state is displayed. In addition, in step S1111, the information (low winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU202 that the result of winning or failing determination of the normal game round this time is the open result of the low winning support state is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM204. 235.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S1104, in step S1112, as a result of stopping the character object display unit 44 in this normal game round, the first high winning support state, the second high winning support state and the low A stop result setting process for losing is executed for setting that the variable display is ended in a state in which none of the winning support states occurs. In addition, in step S1112, the information (normal pattern deviation flag) for specifying that the determination result of the normal pattern game round of this time is a deviation result in the MPU 202 is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

Step S1106, step S1110 ~ S1112 after executing any of the processing, in the step S1113, the general figure fluctuation display time for setting the fluctuation display time of the current general figure game round in the display unit 44 for the role product setting process.

In the normal figure fluctuation display time setting process, by checking the presence or absence of the high frequency support mode flag, to determine whether the high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode, if the high frequency support mode, ROM203 Acquire the normal pattern fluctuation display time information for the high frequency support mode stored in , and set the value corresponding to the information in the normal pattern fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 . On the other hand, in the case of the low frequency support mode, to acquire the general figure fluctuation display time information for the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 203, and store the value corresponding to the information in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 It is set in the provided normal map fluctuation display time counter area. With these normal map fluctuation display time information for high frequency support mode and normal map fluctuation display time information for low frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time is averaged in high frequency support mode than in low frequency support mode. is set to be as short as possible. In this embodiment, 20 sec is uniformly set as normal figure fluctuation display time information for the low frequency support mode.

A variable display time table in which a plurality of types of variable display times are set is stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 for each of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. It may be configured such that the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter for the normal figure is selected from the table. In this case, a portion of the variable display time that can be selected during the high-frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a portion of the variable display time that can be selected during the low-frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, the high-frequency support mode may be set to be shorter than the low-frequency support mode. In addition, not only the value of the fluctuation type counter for normal diagrams, but also the variable display time may be set to differ according to the number of normal diagram pending storage numbers FN. The variable display time may be set to be short, or vice versa.

After executing the setting process of the normal pattern fluctuation display time in step S1113, in step S1114, the normal pattern fluctuation command and the normal pattern type command are set. The normal pattern fluctuation command includes information on the normal pattern fluctuation display time. In addition, the information of the game result is included in the normal figure classification command.

Normal figure variation command and normal figure classification command which are set in step S1114 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the production control device 82, based on the received general pattern variation command and general pattern type command, the content of the production in the general pattern game round is determined, and various devices are operated so that the content of the decided production is executed. Control. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the pattern on the pattern display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the pattern is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. be. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that the symbols corresponding to each normal game cycle are displayed variably.

After that, in step S1115, the variable display of the pattern is started on the accessory display section 44. FIG. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the general-purpose game round control process (FIG. 26), when the character product display unit 44 is in the process of changing display, the general-purpose game round progress processing of steps S1006 to S1009 is executed. In the general pattern game round progress processing, first, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display time of the general pattern game round of this time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information for normal drawing stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the process of setting the normal pattern variable display time. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S1007. In the variable display process, the character object display unit 44 is controlled for display (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the character object display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. , terminates the normal game round control process.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S1008. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of the above steps S1106, S1109, S1111 and S1112 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the character product display unit 44. , the character object display unit 44 is controlled.

In the following step S1009, to set the normal figure fluctuation end command. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The normal figure fluctuation end command set in step S1009 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The production control device 82 receives the normal pattern fluctuation end command, and controls the display control device 212 and the like so as to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of final stop symbols in the normal pattern game round.

<General game state transition processing>
Next, normal figure game state transition processing of step S902 in processing for electric support support will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 30 and the like.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the device is in the support state. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation display of the pattern of the normal game round has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

When it is the timing when the fluctuation display for the general pattern ends, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the game result of the general pattern game cycle of this time corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag is stored in the RAM 204 . If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, support state start processing is executed in step S1204. In the start process, a waiting time for the normal figure opening is set for waiting without starting the opening of the electric accessory 307 for the opening of the support state. Specifically, the waiting time information for the opening of the normal map stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the counter area for the waiting time for the normal map provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 . The standby time for the normal figure opening is set to 2.0 sec for the first high prize support state (see FIG. 16(b)), and 0.2 sec for the second high prize support state and low prize support state. It is set (see FIGS. 16(b) and 16(c)).

In subsequent step S1205, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is the high-frequency support mode, it means that the current support state is the first high prize support state or the low prize support state. "1" is set in the round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is released. On the other hand, if the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, it means that the current support state is the second high winning support state, so in step S1207, "2" is set in the second round counter area RC2. do.

After performing the process of step S1206 or step S1207, a normal figure opening command is set in step S1208. This set normal figure opening command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This general pattern opening command includes the information that it is in the first high winning support state, and the standby time information for the general pattern opening. A performance control device 82 determines the contents of the opening performance corresponding to the support state based on the received normal figure opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that the display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed.

In the subsequent step S1209, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory release signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the release signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the role release signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the role release signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the management control device. It is possible to grasp that a support state has occurred.

In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores the first high winning support flag or the second high winning support flag. The signal output state of the output terminal for the high winning support state signal provided at 99 is defined as the high winning support state signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the high winning support state signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the high winning support state signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine is generated in the management control device. 10, it can be grasped that the high winning support state has occurred.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the device is in the support state, the process advances to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for the opening has passed, the accessory opening/closing process is executed in step S1211. Here, the accessory opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the electric accessary product drive unit 332 . When the electric accessory 307 is not being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" in step S1302, and the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 are set in step S1303. It is determined whether or not the value of the received second timer area T2 is "0".

If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" or if the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the opening/closing processing of the main character is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" and the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the process advances to step S1304 to open the electric accessory 307. The drive unit 332 is put into the drive state (accessory release process).

In subsequent step S1305, setting processing for each round is executed. Setting processing for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is not the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1402 whether the support state is the first high winning support state. In the case of the first high winning support state, in step S1403, "1500" (that is, 3 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in order to measure the opening/closing timing of opening/closing the electric accessory 307. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. In the subsequent step S1404, in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, "5" is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM204. After that, the setting process is terminated.

If the support state is not the first high prize support state in step S1402, it means that the support state is the low prize support state, so "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. . In the following step S1406, "3" is set in the second winning counter area PC2, and this setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in step S1401, "1000" (ie, 2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1407. In the subsequent step S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is "2". If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "2", this setting process ends. "10" is set, and this setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the accessory opening/closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the setting process for each round in step S1305, the normal figure open command is set in step S1306, and the present accessory opening/closing process is terminated. This set normal figure open command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. Information that it is in the first high winning prize support state is included in this normal figure open command. The production control device 82 determines the contents of the production corresponding to the support state based on the received normal figure open command, and controls various devices so that the decided contents of the production are executed.

Also, if the electric accessory 307 is open in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is "0". When the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the upper operation port 303 in step S1308 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 303. . If no prize has been won, the opening/closing process of the main accessory is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the second prize counter area PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S1309, and then in step S1310 whether the value of the second prize counter area PC2 is "0". It is determined whether or not, and if it is not "0", the opening/closing processing of the main role product is terminated.

If the value of the second timer area T2 is "0" at step S1307, or if the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0" at step S1310, it means that the accessory closing condition is established. . In such a case, in step S1311, the electric accessory drive unit 332 is brought into a non-driving state to close the electric accessory 307 (accessory closing process).

In subsequent step S1312, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0", it means that the first opening process of the electric accessory 307 in the second high winning support state has ended. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 as a waiting period until the opening process is executed.

In the following step S1315, set the normal figure closing command, and end the opening and closing process of this role product. This set normal figure closing command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The production control device 82 determines the contents of the production corresponding to the support state based on the received normal figure closing command, and controls various devices so that the decided contents of the production are executed.

If it is determined in step S1313 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0", then in step S1316 support state end processing is executed. In this process, the waiting time for the normal ending is set for waiting without starting the next normal game round for the ending of the support state. Concretely, the waiting time information for the ending of the normal drawing stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area for the normal drawing provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 . The standby time for the normal ending is set to 1.0 sec for the first high winning support state (see FIG. 16(b)), and 0.2 sec for the second high winning support state and low winning support state. It is set (see FIGS. 16(b) and 16(c)).

After that, in step S1317, after setting the normal figure ending command, the opening and closing processing of this role product is terminated. This set normal figure ending command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This general pattern ending command includes the information that it is in the first high winning support state, and the waiting time information for the general pattern ending set in step S1316. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received general-purpose ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that the display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed.

Returning to the description of the general/universal figure game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the opening/closing process of the accessory in step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". Then, in step S1213, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, the end processing of the support state is executed in step S1214. In the support state end processing, various flags for the support state such as the first high prize support flag, the second high prize support flag, and the low prize support flag are erased. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the production control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, the configuration for performing various effects will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 242 is mounted on a performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. In addition, it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 242, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main control device 81, it receives a special figure reservation display control command (first reservation display control information) such as a special figure shift command. In addition, it receives a special figure game round control command (first game round control information) such as a special figure variation command, a special figure type command, and a special figure variation end command. In addition, it receives commands (first state transition information) for opening and closing execution modes such as special figure opening commands and special figure ending commands. In addition, it receives a general pattern game round control command (second game round control information) such as a general pattern variation command, a general pattern type command, and a general pattern variation end command. In addition, it receives a support state command (second state transition information) such as a first high winning support command, a normal drawing opening command, and a normal drawing ending command.

Various table storage areas 245 are set in the ROM 243 to store various tables used in executing various control processes received from the main controller 81 . The RAM 244 also includes various address storage areas 246 used for storing address information for various effects, etc., various flag storage areas 247 used for executing various control processes, and data received from the main control device 81. Command storage area 248 for temporarily storing the command, various counter areas 249 used in executing various control processes, and based on the command from the main control device 81, reservation information on the special figure side and general A pending storage area 250 for storing pending information on the drawing side is set. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can read out from the previously stored commands.

The holding storage area 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 and the electric work holding area 233 in the main controller 81 . As shown in FIG. 32, the holding storage area 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side, with a first secondary holding area 250a, a second secondary holding area 250b, and a first secondary holding area 250b. and an execution area SAE1. The first secondary reservation area 250a corresponds to the first result display section reservation area Ra on the main controller 81 side, and the second secondary reservation area 250b corresponds to the second result display section reservation area Rb. , and the first secondary execution area SAE1 corresponds to the first execution area AE1. The first secondary reservation area 250a and the second secondary reservation area 250b each have four storage areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each area is set so as to be able to store information included in the command regarding the hold information on the special figure side received from the main control device 81 side.

Further, the holding storage area 250 is provided with a secondary electrician holding area 250c and a second secondary execution area SAE2 corresponding to the electrical work holding area 233 on the main controller 81 side. The secondary electrician reservation area 250c corresponds to the electrician reservation area Rc, and the second secondary execution area SAE2 corresponds to the second execution area AE2. The sub-side assistant reservation area 250c has four storage areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each area is set so as to be able to store information included in a command relating to hold information on the general map side received from the main controller 81 side.

As shown in FIG. 31, on the output side of the MPU 242, as already described, the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display light emitting unit 63 provided in the front door frame 14, the winning The light emitting substrate 359 and the speaker section 64 provided in the unit 301 are connected, and the display control device 212 is also connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which are mounted an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257. there is

The MPU 252, from the effect control device 82, a special figure reservation display control command (first reservation display control information) for performing reservation display control of the special figure side, a special figure for performing a variable display of the design of the special figure side Receives a game cycle control command (first game cycle control information), an opening/closing execution mode command (first state transition information) for displaying moving images during the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In addition, the general pattern game round control command (second game round control information) for performing the variable display of the pattern on the general pattern side, the command for performing the production during the support state (second state transition information), etc. receive. Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, to generate an internal command for the VDP 255).

The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images.

The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252 . These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254 .

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 252 and the video RAM 257 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 256 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 256 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 256 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 .

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

<About processing related to various effects on the special figure side>
Processing related to various effects on the special figure side will be described. As processing related to the special figure side production, mainly variable display control processing is set.

<Varying display control processing performed by the production control device 82>
Variation display control processing on the special figure side executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

The variable display control process is activated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec). Then, in the variation display control process, when the command for special figure variation transmitted from the main controller 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbols for one game, and the main controller 81 When the special figure fluctuation end command transmitted from 81 is received, the process of final stop display of the fluctuation display of the design is executed.

In the variable display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, at step S1501 whether or not the special symbol game is in progress, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 41 is performing variable display of symbols for one game. determine whether or not If the variation display of the symbol for one game is not performed, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation command transmitted from the main controller 81 is received in step S1502. When the command for special figure fluctuation is not received, this fluctuation display control processing is terminated as it is. When the special figure variation command is received, after executing the special figure variation start process in step S1503, the variation display control process is terminated. Here, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1601, the special figure variation command received this time is read, and the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and the information on the variation display time are specified from the command. In addition, as already explained, the main controller 81 also transmits a special figure type command when transmitting a special figure variation command. Therefore, in step S1601, read out the special figure type command received together with the special figure variation command received this time, and from the command, the information of the probability variation jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result and 15R probability variation jackpot result), normal jackpot result information (6R normal jackpot results). Then, in step S1601, from the specified information, information on the presence or absence of jackpot winning, information on jackpot type in the case of jackpot winning, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence in the case of jackpot non-winning, and variable display time information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the first secondary side execution area SAE1 in the reserve storage area 250 of the RAM 244. FIG.

In the subsequent step S1602, based on the information grasped in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the game result of the special figure game round to be started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot result, a 15R probability variable jackpot result, or a 6R normal jackpot result, in the following step S1603, a jackpot effect setting process is executed.

In the effect setting process for the big win, the stop result determination process for the big win is executed. Specifically, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result that the combination of the same specific pattern (main pattern with an odd number) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 determined as a result of the suspension of In addition, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot result, a stop result in which the same non-specific pattern (main pattern with an even number) is combined on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. . Furthermore, in the effect setting process for the big win, the variable display time of the game cycle to be executed this time is referred to, and the process of setting the effect pattern for the big win such as normal reach or super reach is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1602 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1604. In step S1604, it is determined whether reach will occur in the current game round. When reach occurs, it advances to step S1605, effect setting processing for reach occurrence is executed.

In the production setting process for reach occurrence, stop result determination process for off reach is executed. Specifically, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combination of winning reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Furthermore, in the effect setting process for occurrence of ready-to-win, the variable display time of the game cycle to be executed this time is referred to, and the process of setting the effect pattern for out-of-reach such as normal reach and super reach is executed.

If reach is not generated in step S1604, the process advances to step S1606 to execute an effect setting process for normal deviation. In the production setting process for normal deviation, the stop result determination process for reach non-occurrence is executed. In such processing, the current stopping result is determined so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 and not to stop the combination of winning reach symbols. Furthermore, in the production setting process for normal deviation, a process of setting an production pattern for normal deviation with no reach occurring is executed.

After the processing of step S1603, step S1605 or step S1606 is executed, in step S1607, commands including the determined stop result and effect pattern information are output to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Execute the processing to be performed. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 41 based on the received stop result command and pattern command to perform the effect in the current special figure game round.

In the subsequent step S1608, after executing the process for starting the special figure game round effect, this special figure fluctuation starting process is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 is started based on the determined production pattern, and the production for the special figure game cycle is started.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 33), if the special figure game is not in progress at step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1504, whether the special figure fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 81 is received determine whether If the special figure fluctuation end command is not received, after executing the special figure fluctuation process in step S1505, this fluctuation display control process is terminated. In the special figure fluctuation intermediate process, the display control device 212 is controlled so as to execute the special figure game round with the production contents determined in the special figure fluctuation start process. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation end command is received in step S1504, after executing the special figure fluctuation end process in step S1506, this fluctuation display control process is ended. In the special figure fluctuation end processing, as a process for ending the special figure game round, the variation display is ended to inform the game result of the special figure game round, and various flags and counters used in the special figure game round Execute clear processing.

<Regarding processing related to various effects on the Fuchu side>
Next, a description will be given of the processing related to various effects on the general-purpose map side. As processing related to various effects on the side of the general pattern, it is roughly divided into general pattern fluctuation display control processing related to production control of the general pattern game round, and support state processing related to production control for support state, and are set. These processes are activated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

<Normal map fluctuation display control processing>
First, the normal figure fluctuation display control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. In the general pattern fluctuation display control process, when the general pattern fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the pattern display device 41 starts the fluctuation display of the general pattern pattern for one game, and the main When the general pattern fluctuation end command transmitted from the control device 81 is received, the process of displaying the fluctuation display of the general pattern is finally stopped.

In the normal pattern fluctuation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Determine whether it is running. When the variation display of the normal pattern for one game round is not performed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern variation command transmitted from the main controller 81 is received in step S1702. If the general pattern fluctuation command is not received, the normal pattern fluctuation display control process is terminated as it is. When the normal pattern fluctuation command is received, after executing the normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S1703, the normal pattern fluctuation display control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the normal pattern for one game is performed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 81 is received in step S1704. When the normal pattern fluctuation end command is not received, after executing the normal pattern fluctuation process in step S1705, the normal pattern fluctuation display control process is terminated. When the general pattern fluctuation end command is received in step S1704, after executing the general pattern fluctuation end processing in step S1706, the normal pattern fluctuation display control processing is ended. In the general pattern fluctuation end processing, as a process for ending the general pattern game round, the fluctuation display is ended to notify the game result of the general pattern game round, and various flags and counters used in the general pattern game round Execute clear processing.

<Processing for starting normal pattern fluctuation>
The normal pattern fluctuation start process is a process for starting the production for the normal pattern game round based on the reception of the normal pattern fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 81 . Here, prior to the description of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing, the production contents of the normal pattern game round will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 36(a).

As already explained, the variable display of the normal game cycle on the display screen G is performed by switching the display colors of the two display units in the normal pattern display area P. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (a1), the display color of the two display units is the same color or substantially the same first display color (for example, white) when the normal figure game round is started from the situation, As shown in FIG. 36(a2), the display color of one of the display units is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) that is different from the previous color (in the figure, the difference in color of the display units is hatched). are displayed differently depending on the After that, as shown in FIG. 36(a3), the color of the display section switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display section is changed to the first display color. to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 36(a4), the color of each display is switched again. The variable display of the normal game round is basically repeated switching of the display colors of these two display units (Fig. 36 (a2) → Fig. 36 (a3) → Fig. 36 (a4) → Fig. 36 (a2) repetition). This display color switching is set to make one round in about 0.5 sec, making it difficult for the player to distinguish the respective displays before and after switching.

When the fluctuation display time of the normal game round passes, notification of the open result that shifts to the support state as the game result of the normal game round or the disconnection result is performed. In the case of the open result, as shown in FIG. 36(a5), both of the two display units become the second display color, and the variable display ends. 2, both of the two display portions become the first display color, and the variable display ends. That is, the notification mode of the variation display and the game result in the regular game round (result of stopping the variable display) has a simple configuration compared to the special figure game round side.

Now, in the normal pattern fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Identify time information. In addition, as already explained, the main control unit 81 also transmits the general pattern type command when transmitting the general pattern variation command. Therefore, in step S1801, the general pattern type command received together with the general pattern variation command received this time is read, and the information of the game result (open result or off result) is specified from the command. Then, in step S1801, from the specified information, information on whether or not the release result is obtained and information on the variable display time are grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the second secondary execution area SAE2 in the storage area 250 for reservation of the RAM 244. Remember.

In the following step S1802, based on the information grasped in step S1801, the process of setting the stop result in the normal game round to start this time is executed. That is, when the information specified in step S1801 is the open result, the stop result is displayed so that the two display units are stopped and displayed in the second display color at the end of the variable display in the normal game round of this time. Also, if the information specified in step S1801 is a result of deviation, the two display units are displayed in the first display color at the end of the variable display in this normal game round. Set the stop result.

Then, in step S1803, after executing the process of outputting a command to the display control device 212 so as to start the production for the normal figure game round, this normal figure fluctuation start process is terminated. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the pattern display device 41 in order to execute the effect in the current regular game cycle. It should be noted that, as described above, the display color of the two display units in the general-purpose display area P is only switched in the general-purpose game round, so the display control device 212 receives the command Based on this, the display control of the pattern display device 41 is performed so as to periodically switch the display color of the display unit.

<Normal map fluctuation mid-use processing>
In the normal pattern fluctuation middle process, the display control device 212 is controlled so as to execute the normal pattern game round with the effect content determined in the normal pattern fluctuation start process. In addition, in the normal figure variation intermediate use process, when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state, the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 of the winning unit 301 emit special light emission effects. Control the light emitting substrate 359 to run. This special light emitting effect is executed prior to the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307, and suggests to the player that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state is executed. . Here, the contents of the special light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG.

Before starting the special light emission effect, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, if the result of the general figure propriety determination is the result of shifting to the first high winning support state, after the start of the fluctuation display in the general figure game round, at the end of the fluctuation display (timing t3 in FIG. 37 (b)) At a timing (timing t1) 3 seconds before (timing t1), the light emitting modes of the first and second light emitting sections 311 and 317 are switched so as to start the special light emitting effect.

In the special light emission effect, first, as shown in FIG. 37(a2), the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are switched to the first light emitting state A2 in which white light is emitted. This first light emitting state A2 is executed so that the first and second light emitting sections 311 and 317 start emitting light at the same time, and continues for 1 second from the start of the light emission. During the execution of the first light emission state, each of the light emission units 311 and 317 is controlled so as to maintain white light emission.

At timing t2 after one second from the start of the first light emitting state A2, as shown in FIG. It is switched to the light emission state A3. The second light emission state A3 continues for 2 seconds from timing t2. That is, the second light emission state A3 is performed so that the switching to the red light emission is completed 2 seconds after the start.

During execution of the second light emitting state A3, the lighting state of each light emitter 360 is controlled such that the first light emitting section 311 emits light continuously while the second light emitting section 317 blinks. This is because, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the game ball flows down in front of the first light emitting part 311, while the second light emitting part 317 does not overlap the area where the game ball flows (see FIG. 8). As a result, the light emission modes of the two are different. That is, the first light emitting unit 311 emphasizes the visibility of the game ball, and provides light emission effects that do not involve a drastic change in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting unit 317 makes it easy to attract the player's attention by blinking. In order to further improve the visibility of the game ball in the first light emitting section 311 , the light emission intensity (light emission brightness) of the first light emitting section 311 may be made lower than that of the second light emitting section 317 .

After timing t3 two seconds after the start of the second light emission state A3, as shown in FIG. 37(a4), the first and second light emission units 311 and 317 continue to emit red light in the third light emission state A4. Even during execution of the third light emission state A4, the first light emission unit 311 is controlled to continuously emit light and the second light emission unit 317 is controlled to blink, similarly to the second light emission state A3. This third light emission state A4 continues until the end of the special light emission effect. Note that the special light emission effect ends when the electric accessory 307 is switched from the open state to the closed state.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned special light emission effect is not performed when the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the low prize support state and the second high prize support state, and is not performed when it is opened and closed in the first high prize support state. It is a special performance.

Next, the processing for normal figure fluctuation during which is executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. 38 . Here, the control processing relating to the special light emission effect will be mainly described.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the special lighting effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special light emission flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244 . The special light emission flag is stored when the special light emission effect starts, and is erased when the special light emission effect ends.

If the special lighting effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the first high winning support command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If the first high winning support command has not been received, the process during this fluctuation is terminated.

If the first high winning support command has been received, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not it is time to execute the special light emission effect. Specifically, after grasping the fluctuation display time of this normal game round based on the command for normal figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control device 81, whether the remaining fluctuation display time of the game round is 3 sec determine whether or not If it is not the execution timing of the special light emission effect, the processing during this change is terminated.

If it is time to execute the special light emission effect, in step S1904, the first light emission state A2 is executed, and the light emission modes of the first and second light emission units 311 and 317 are switched to the first light emission state A2. In subsequent step S1905, the special light emission flag is set in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244, and then in step S1906, the first light emission flag is set in the same flag storage area 247. The first light emission flag is a flag indicating that the first light emission state A2 is being executed. Next, in step S1907, "500" (that is, 1 sec) is set in the timer area ST provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 244, and this in-fluctuation processing ends. The value set in step S1907 is decremented by 1 every time the normal figure fluctuation display control process (FIG. 35) is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If the special lighting effect is being executed in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1908 to determine whether or not the first lighting state A2 is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first light emission flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244 . If the first light emitting state A2 is being executed, in step S1909 it is determined whether the value of the timer area ST is "0", that is, whether the execution period of the first light emitting state A2 has elapsed. judge. If the value of the timer area ST is not "0", the process during fluctuation is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer area ST is "0", in step S1910, the second light emission state A3 is executed, and the light emission mode of the first and second light emission units 311 and 317 is changed to the second light emission state. Switch to A3. Further, in step S1910, the first light emission flag stored in various flag storage area 247 of RAM 244 is erased. In subsequent step S1911, the second light emission flag is set in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244. FIG. The second light emission flag is a flag indicating that the second light emission state A3 is being executed. Next, in step S1912, "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the timer area ST, and this in-varying process ends.

If the first light emission state A2 is not being executed in step S1908, the process advances to step S1913 to determine whether or not the second light emission state A3 is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second light emission flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244 . If the second light emission state A3 is being executed, in step S1914 it is determined whether the value of the timer area ST is "0", that is, whether the execution period of the second light emission state A3 has elapsed. judge. If the value of the timer area ST is not "0", the process during fluctuation is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer area ST is "0", in step S1915, the third light emission state A4 is executed, and the light emission mode of the first and second light emission units 311 and 317 is changed to the third light emission state. Switch to A4. Also, in step S1915, the second light emission flag stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244 is erased. After that, this in-varying process ends.

If the second light emitting state A3 is not being executed in step S1913, it means that the third light emitting state A4 is being executed, so that the changing process is terminated as it is to continue the third light emitting state A4. do.

<Processing for support status>
Next, the support state processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing support state processing, and FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining effects during the support state.

In the support state processing, based on the command for the support state such as the general pattern opening command and the normal pattern ending command transmitted from the main control device 81, the pattern display device 41 performs processing for performing the effect during the support state. Run.

That is, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the normal game round is being executed. When the normal game round is being executed, the support state processing is terminated as it is. In this process, in the normal pattern fluctuation display control process, the normal pattern game round is being executed from the time when the normal pattern fluctuation start processing is executed until the end of the normal pattern fluctuation end processing. Specifically, a variable display is started in the character product display unit 44 and the pattern display device 41 on the main control device 81 side, and when the variable display is completed, the result of the lottery on the normal symbol side is announced. It is determined that the regular game round is being executed until it is notified as a stop result. In addition, for this determination, for example, in the process of starting the production for the normal game round in step S1803 of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 36(b)), the normal pattern execution Stores the medium flag. Then, when executing the finalized display in the normal pattern fluctuation end processing (finishing the fluctuation display), it is configured to erase the normal pattern executing flag, and whether or not the flag is stored in step S2001 It is good to set it as the structure which determines.

If it is not during execution of the normal game round, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous normal game round was the result corresponding to the transition to the support state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous normal game round was the open result. If the result is not an open result, but a disengagement result, the support state processing is terminated as it is. If it is an open result, the process proceeds to step S2003.

It should be noted that the production during this support state may also be configured to vary according to the game state on the special figure side. In addition, it is possible to have a configuration in which the production during the support state is different depending on each opening result on the normal side, and the opening result selected depending on the game state on the special side may be different, so that the production during the support state is different. . In this way, it is possible to appropriately notify the support state according to the state of the special figure side.

In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the opening control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed as a result of shifting to the support state. If it is determined that the opening and closing control is not being executed, that is, if the opening and closing control of the electric auditors 307 is not currently being executed even if the game result of the previous normal game round is the open result, go to step S2004 move on. The case where the process proceeds to step S2004 refers to the waiting time, that is, the opening period (OP period) before the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed, or after the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed and Waiting time until the start of the game round, that is, the ending period (ED period), and the situation where the acquisition of the reservation information on the normal side which is the trigger of the general pattern game round is not performed. In the present embodiment, a dedicated effect is set when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state. Execute the processing to be done during the period.

In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the general pattern opening command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. When the normal figure opening command is received, it is determined whether or not the first high winning prize support command from the main controller 81 is received in step S2005. If the general figure opening command and the first high prize support command are received, it means that it is the OP period immediately before the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high prize support state, so step S2006 , and a process for performing a special display effect B1 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 is executed.

The special display effect B1 is for notifying the player that the opening/closing control of the electric accessary 307 is performed in the first high winning support state, that is, the situation is such that it is easy to acquire the winning or losing lottery opportunity of the second special figure. belongs to. As this special display effect B1, for example, as shown in FIG. A configuration is conceivable in which the background color is changed to a dedicated color different from the previous background color.

Note that “electric chew” is an abbreviation for electric tulip, in other words, it is a common name for the electric accessory 307 and the upper operation port 303 . The display 381 is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen G because the electric accessary 307 and the upper operation port 303 are positioned below the center of the display screen G, and the display 381 is displayed on the display screen G It is displayed in the area near the electric accessory 307 and the upper operation opening 303 among them.

At step S2006 in FIG. 39, a command including information on the content of the special display effect B1 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special display effect B1 from the character ROM 256 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

If the normal figure opening command is not received in step S2004, if it is determined that the first high winning prize support command is not received in step S2005, or after executing the process of step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007 . In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the general pattern ending command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. When the normal figure ending command is received, it is determined whether or not the first high winning prize support command from the main controller 81 is received in step S2008. If the general figure ending command and the first high prize support command are received, it means that it is the ED period immediately after the electric role product 307 is opened and closed in the first high prize support state, so step S2009 , and a process for performing a special ending effect B2 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 is executed.

The special ending effect B2 is for notifying the player that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state has ended, that is, the situation in which the special figure side is likely to be acquired has ended. It is. In the special ending effect B2, for example, as shown in FIG. A configuration is conceivable, such as returning to the normal color before execution of the special display effect B1, or changing to an ending color different from the background color or normal color during execution of the special display effect B1.

At step S2009 in FIG. 39, a command including information on the content of the special ending effect B2 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special ending effect B2 from the character ROM 256 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

After execution of step S2009, end processing of the special lighting effect (FIG. 37(a)) is executed in step S2010. In this step, the light emitting board 359 is controlled to extinguish the first and second light emitting sections 311 and 317, and the special light emission flag stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244 is erased.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 307 is being executed in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2011, and the supporting state processing is completed after performing the supporting state processing. In the support state processing of step S2011, processing for continuing the special display effect started with the start of the OP period is executed.

The special display effect B1 and the special ending effect B2 are not performed when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the low prize support state and the second high prize support state, and the first high prize support. It is a special production of the state.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state will be described with reference mainly to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, at timing t11, when a winning prize to the through gate 35 occurs, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor. The start of the variable display of the figure game round is executed. This variable display continues for 20 seconds until timing t13.

If the result of the normal drawing lottery is the result of shifting to the first high winning support state, at timing t12 after the start of the fluctuation, the special light emission effect by the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 of the winning unit 301 be started. This special lighting effect is for suggesting to the player that the opening/closing control of the first high winning support state is executed by the electric accessory 307 . As already explained, the special light emission effect is started 3 seconds before the timing t13 when the variable display of the normal game cycle ends, and then the light emission mode is sequentially switched from the first light emission state A2 to the third light emission state A4. (See FIG. 37).

At timing t13, when the variable display of the normal game cycle ends, the OP period in the first high winning support state is started, and the special display effect B1 is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. This special display effect B1 is for informing the player that the situation is such that it is easy to acquire the chance of winning the lottery for the second special figure. !!” is displayed 381 (see FIG. 40).

When the opening period ends at timing t14, the electric accessary 307 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the upper operation opening 303 is in a state where game balls can easily win.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of occurrence of the 15R jackpot when winning the jackpot is higher in the case of winning the prize in the upper working port 303 than in the lower working port 305. The upper operating port 303 is an operating port more advantageous for the player than the port 305. - 特許庁Therefore, the player strongly desires that the game ball wins the upper working hole 303 .

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 307 is in a closed state, it is difficult to win a prize to the upper operation opening 303, and the chance of winning a game ball to the upper operation opening 303 is very limited. ing. That is, in the game state in which the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the low-frequency support mode, most of the open/close control is in the low winning support state even if the success/failure lottery result on the side of the normal drawing shifts to the support state. Therefore, the period in which regular winnings to the upper operation port 303 can be expected is limited to the period in which the high-frequency support mode is entered. In particular, since the high-frequency support mode can only occur when the win/loss lottery result on the side of the special figure wins a big win, for a player who has never won a big win, there is no opportunity to win a game ball into the upper working port 303. It becomes almost non-existent.

Therefore, the first high prize winning support state that occurs in the low frequency support mode is a valuable opportunity for the player to expect a prize to be won in the upper operating port 303, and the player can: It is eagerly desired that as many game balls as possible enter the upper working hole 303.例文帳に追加Moreover, since the frequency of occurrence of the first high prize winning support state in the low frequency support mode is low, the player's desire to make effective use of such state becomes even stronger.

In such a situation, depending on the positional relationship between the variable actuating opening provided with the electric accessory and the non-variable actuating opening not provided with the electric accessory, when the electric accessory is in the open state, the game The ball may not reach the variable working opening by entering the non-variable working opening. In other words, the non-variable operation opening deprives the movable operation opening of the opportunity to win a prize in spite of the open state, and the player cannot fully enjoy the benefits of opening the electric accessory.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the electric accessory 307 is arranged above (upstream) the lower operation opening 305, and when the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, it is received. The area RA is configured to be formed on the first flow-down route R1 (the flow-down route of the game ball to the lower operation port 305). Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the lower operation port 305 reaches the receiving area RA before reaching the lower operation port 305, and the reception of the game ball by the lower operation port 305 is suppressed. . As a result, the opportunity to win a prize to the upper operation port 303 is stably ensured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit due to the occurrence of the first high prize winning support state.

Moreover, when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, the game ball can flow down in front of the electric accessory 307 (opening/closing member 331), so that the electric accessory 307 can move the game to the lower operation opening 305. The flow of balls is not hindered.

Returning to the description of FIG. 41, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state at timing t14, the first game ball enters the upper operation port 303 at timing t15 immediately after that, and the second result The variable display of the game times of the second special figure is started on the display section BS. While the upper limit period of the open state is set to 3 sec until timing t18, since the game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 sec, four game balls successively win following the first game ball. (Timing t16 to timing t17), a total of 5 game balls win. As the second and subsequent game balls win, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure increases in order, and the number of reserved memories becomes four when the fifth game ball wins.

Here, the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is set to 4, and even if there is a prize to the upper operation port 303 exceeding it, the winning will be connected to the winning lottery of the second special symbol. It will not stick. In other words, a prize winning that exceeds the upper limit of the number of pending memories is invalid in relation to the winning lottery.

In this regard, the open state of the first high winning support state is configured to end on the condition that 3 seconds have passed since the start of the open state or the number of winning prizes in the upper operation port 303 reaches 5. there is As a result, a total of 5 game balls, 1 corresponding to the variable display of the game round of the first 2nd special pattern and 4 until the number of reserved memories of the 2nd special pattern reaches the upper limit, can be won. However, the number of winning prizes may not exceed that. In other words, it is possible to provide a configuration in which invalid prizes are unlikely to occur while the number of reserved memories is maximized, and the player can effectively utilize the opening and closing of the electric accessory 307 in the first high prize winning support state.

In particular, since the winning unit 301 is configured so that the winning to the upper operating port 303 is less likely to be hindered by the lower operating port 305, the upper limit number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 and the upper limit period for opening the electric accessory 307 can be set as described above. It is possible to increase the significance of what has been defined as follows. That is, when the electric accessory 307 is opened, an event occurs such that the number of winning game balls into the upper operation opening 303 does not reach 5 even after the upper limit of the opening period of 3 seconds has passed since the start. Therefore, the player can more effectively utilize the opportunity to open the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state.

When the fifth game ball wins at timing t17, the number of winning prizes reaches the upper limit, so the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state. Thereafter, an ending effect is performed until timing t19 (see FIG. 40).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The upper operating port 303 provided with the electric accessory 307 is arranged above the lower operating port 305, and the receiving area RA is formed on the first flow-down route R1 when the electric accessory 307 is in an open state. configured to As a result, the player can properly enjoy the profit resulting from the occurrence of the first high prize winning support state.

A second guide portion 371 is provided on the front surface 331 b of the opening/closing member 331 , and the game ball is guided to the lower operation opening 305 in front of the opening/closing member 331 by the second guide portion 371 . Thereby, the front area of the opening/closing member 331 can be utilized as a guide area. In this case, compared with the configuration in which the game ball only flows down in front of the opening/closing door, the game ball can be stably flowed down, and the game ball can be favorably guided to the lower operating port 305. - 特許庁

A first light emitting part 311 is arranged adjacently above the electric accessory 307, and a game ball can flow down in front of the first light emitting part 311.例文帳に追加In addition, in the first light emitting unit 311, before the occurrence of the first high winning support state (before switching to the open state of the electric accessory 307), it is configured to execute a special light emission effect.

Where the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball wins the upper operation opening 303, the proximity of the electric accessory 307 and the first light emitting part 311 concentrates the attention of the player. can be done. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game ball has entered the upper working hole 303 while visually recognizing the special light emission effect, and the degree of attention to each of the special light emission effect and the electric accessory 307 can be effectively increased. can be increased to

Furthermore, since the special lighting effects are started before the occurrence of the first high winning support state, the player can predict the occurrence of the support state in advance. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a preparation period for aiming at the electric accessory 307 (upper working port 303), and whether or not the game ball passing in front of the first light emitting unit 311 wins the upper working port 303 It becomes possible to provide a playability to enjoy.

In addition, since the first light emitting unit 311 is provided on the downflow path (first to third downflow paths R1 to R3) of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, the downflow path is not only a downflow area for the game ball, It can also be used as a notification area. In this case, compared to the configuration in which the flowing area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to ensure a large flowing area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

The horizontal width of the first light emitting portion 311 (translucent portion 341) is set to the size of a plurality of game balls, and a plurality of flow-down paths are formed on the first light emitting portion 311. FIG. When a game ball passes in front of the first light emitting unit 311, there is a concern that the visibility of the special light emitting effect due to the game ball may decrease. Even if the game ball flows down, the special light emission performance can be visually recognized through the remaining part. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the problem that it is difficult to grasp the contents of the special light emitting effect due to the game ball passing in front of the first light emitting part 311, and to achieve both the flowing area and the notification area. A configuration that is practically preferable can be realized.

The pattern display device 41 , the electric accessory 307 and the first light emitting portion 311 are arranged vertically, and the first light emitting portion 311 is arranged between the pattern display device 41 and the electric accessory 307 . According to this configuration, while the player is paying attention to the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, he/she shifts his/her line of sight to the first light emitting section 311 at the start of the special light emitting effect, and then follows the flow of the game balls. All that is necessary is to move the line of sight to the electric accessory 307 . That is, the natural downward movement of the line of sight starting from the display screen G makes it possible to visually recognize the first light emitting unit 311 and the electric accessory 307 in an appropriate order, thereby facilitating the understanding of the presentation. .

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the upper winning section in the winning unit 301 is different from that of the first embodiment. The upper winning portion 401 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is a front view of the prize winning unit 301, FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the prize winning unit viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 44 is a sectional view along the line BB of FIG. 42, and FIG. It is a front view. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the upper winning portion 401 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. is set. In addition, the opening/closing member 331 is formed with a notch portion 411 through which the second guide portion 403 can be inserted. This configuration will be described in detail below.

The second guide portion 403 is provided in a partition wall 405 that partitions the upper guide passage 333, as shown in FIG. 44(a). Specifically, it is formed integrally with the upper wall portion 405a of the partition wall 405 and extends linearly forward from the upper wall portion 405a to the front (front side) of the opening/closing member 331 .

The second guide portion 403 has a different vertical width between the portion located behind the opening/closing member 331 in the closed position and the portion located in front thereof. Specifically, the vertical width of the rear portion 403a located behind the opening/closing member 331 is smaller than that of the front portion 403b located forward, and the height position of the lower end of the rear portion 403a is higher than that of the front portion 403b. getting higher. Thereby, a space having a height larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the upper guide passage 333 and the passage bottom surface 333a. This is for allowing the game ball to move smoothly in the upper guide passage 333 .

The upper guide passage 333 is configured to collect the game balls entering the upper guide passage 333 at one place so that the game balls that have entered the upper operation port 303 can be detected one by one. That is, in the rear wall portion 405b of the partition wall 405, an opening 407 (see FIG. 42) having a size through which one game ball can pass is provided. It is configured to detect by For this reason, the passage bottom surface 333a is inclined so as to guide the game ball of the upper guide passage 333 to the opening 407, and the game ball that has entered the upper guide passage 333 is laterally along the inclination on the passage bottom surface 333a. will move in the direction

Since the vertical width of the rear portion 403a is set as described above, the game ball can move smoothly in the upper guide passage 333, and the stagnation of the game ball in the upper guide passage 333 is suppressed. As a result, the game ball in the upper guide passage 333 prevents the subsequent game ball from entering the operation opening 303, and prevents the opening/closing member 331 from being displaced to the closed position. .

On the other hand, the vertical width of the front portion 403b of the second guide portion 403 is the same as that of the second guide portion 371 according to the first embodiment. That is, the distance L6 to the first guide portion 365 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance L7 to the lower operation port case 337 (lower operation port 305) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. .

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 , vertically long notch portions 411 are formed in the upper edge portion of the opening/closing member 331 so as to correspond to the second guide portions 403 . The second guide portion 403 can be inserted through the notch portion 411 at least when the opening/closing member 331 is positioned at the closed position. Thereby, interference between the opening/closing member 331 and the second guide portion 403 is avoided, and the opening/closing member 331 can be rotated.

Here, in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, only the opening/closing member 331 is displaced, and the second guide portion 403 is immovable. . That is, the position of the second guide portion 403 is fixed. Therefore, the second guide part 403 can be extended to the extent that it does not come into contact with the window panel 62, and the distance L8 to the window panel 62 can be easily made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the second guide part 403, and the game ball can be properly guided.

Also in the prize winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, the game ball on the first flow-down path R1 is pushed through the first guide portion 365 and the second guide portion. When guided to the lower operation port 305 by the part 403 and the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, the game balls on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 can win the upper operation port 303. Therefore, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
In this modified example, the configuration of the second guide portion is different from that in the second embodiment. The second guide portion 451 of this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the second guide portion 451, and is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the CC line cross-section of FIG. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the second embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the second guide portion 451 according to this modification faces the front surface 331b of the opening/closing member 331 in a manner to be spaced apart from the front surface 331b of the opening/closing member 331 located in the closed position. A facing portion 453 is provided. Specifically, the second guide portion 451 extends from the rear to the front of the opening/closing member 331 while maintaining its narrow vertical width, and is configured to widen in front of the opening/closing member 331 toward the front. there is

An edge portion 453a of the facing portion 453 is formed in a curved shape when viewed from the side (in the axial direction of the rotation shaft of the opening/closing member 331). The curvature of the edge portion 453a corresponds to the curvature of the turning trajectory of the opening/closing member 331, and more specifically, the curvature of the trajectory PT of the point J on the bottom surface 411a of the notch 411 is substantially the same. In this case, the opening/closing member 331 can be rotated while maintaining a substantially constant gap with the second guide portion 451 .

With such a configuration, the size (vertical dimension) of the notch portion 411 can be reduced in order to suppress interference between the opening/closing member 331 and the second guide portion 451 . As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately guide the game ball flowing down in front of the opening/closing member 331 while suppressing the decrease in rigidity and strength of the opening/closing member 331 caused by the notch portion 411 .

In addition, in the above modification, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the edge portion 453a of the facing portion 453 may be linear. Also in this case, the notch portion 411 can be made smaller than in the configuration of the second embodiment, and the rigidity and strength of the opening/closing member 331 can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the upper winning section in the winning unit 301 is different from that of the first embodiment. The upper winning portion 501 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. 47 is a front view of the prize winning unit 301, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the prize winning unit viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 49 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the upper winning portion 501 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. is set. Further, the opening/closing member 511 is formed with a through hole 517 through which the second guide portion 503 can be inserted. This configuration will be described in detail below.

The second guide portion 503 is provided in a partition wall 405 that partitions the upper guide passage 333, as shown in FIG. 49(a). Specifically, it is formed integrally with the upper wall portion 405a of the partition wall 405 and extends linearly forward from the upper wall portion 405a to the front (front side) of the opening/closing member 331 .

The distance between the second guide portion 503 and the first guide portion 365 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the second guide portion 503 and the lower operating port case 337 (lower operating port 305) is the diameter of the game ball. is larger than Also, the distance between the second guide portion 503 and the window panel 62 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the second guide portion 503, the height position of the lower end of the rear portion 503a is higher than that of the front portion 503b. This is for facilitating the movement of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 , the opening/closing member 511 includes a standing wall-shaped front wall portion 513 and an extension portion 515 extending rearward from the rear surface of the front wall portion 513 . The front wall portion 513 and the extension portion 515 are integrally formed, and the opening/closing member 511 has a substantially L-shaped longitudinal section.

The opening/closing member 511 is held by the base body 320 so as to be linearly movable in the front-rear direction, and is configured to open and close the upper operation opening 303 by moving in the front-rear direction. That is, the game board 24 (plate-like base portion 321) is prevented from protruding from the front surface and the closed position covers the upper operation opening 303, and the game board 24 (plate-like base portion 321) has an upper operation opening that protrudes forward from the front surface 321a. 303 can be displaced to an open position. The upper surface of the extended portion 515, that is, the ball receiving surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear, and the game ball entering the opening/closing member 511 is guided rearward.

As shown in FIG. 47 , a through hole 517 is formed in the front wall portion 513 so as to correspond to the second guide portion 403 . The second guide portion 503 can be inserted through the through hole 517 . Thereby, interference between the opening/closing member 511 and the second guide portion 503 is avoided, and the opening/closing member 511 can be moved back and forth.

By the way, in the structure in which the second guide part 503 is inserted into the through hole of the opening/closing member, interference between the second guide part 503 and the opening/closing member occurs when the opening/closing member is displaced between the open position and the closed position by rotation. In order to avoid this, it is necessary to enlarge the through hole, and there is a concern that the rigidity and strength of the opening/closing member may be lowered. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the opening/closing member 511 is displaced between the open position and the closed position by linear movement in the front-rear direction, the enlargement of the through hole 517 is suppressed, and the above-described inconvenience is preferably resolved. becomes possible.

Incidentally, in the case of a configuration in which the upper working port 303 is opened and closed by linear movement in the front-rear direction, a configuration in which the front wall portion 513 is not provided in the opening and closing member 511 is also conceivable. However, in the configuration in which the second guide portion 503 is located in front of the upper operation port 303, the flow direction of the game ball changes due to contact with the second guide portion 503, and the game ball moves upward even in the closed state. It is assumed that it will fly into the actuation opening 303 . According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the opening/closing member 511 is positioned at the closed position, the upper operating opening 303 is covered with the front wall portion 513, thereby suppressing an unexpected winning due to the diving. be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, the front surface of the front wall portion 513 is inclined so that the distance from the window panel 62 increases downward. In this case, even if a game ball is caught between the front wall portion 513 and the window panel 62 when the opening/closing member 511 is displaced from the closed position toward the open position, the game ball can easily escape downward. So-called ball biting is suppressed.

Also in the prize winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. When guided to the lower operation port 305 by the second guide part 503 and the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, the game balls on the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 can win the upper operation port 303. Therefore, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the first guide section in the winning unit 301 is different from that in each of the above-described embodiments. The first guide portion 603 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. FIG. 50 is a front view of the prize winning unit 301, FIG. 51 is a perspective view of the prize winning unit viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view along line EE of FIG. 50, and FIG. It is a front view. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the prize winning unit 301 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first guide portion 603 hangs below the lower end of the translucent portion 341 and extends forward of the opening/closing member 331 positioned at the closed position. extends to In this configuration, the portion of the first guide portion 603 positioned in front of the opening/closing member 331 serves as the second guide portion in each of the above-described embodiments.

In the first guide portion 603, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in front of the opening/closing member 331 located in the closed position, a facing portion 605 is provided so as to face the front surface 331b of the opening/closing member 331 so as to be spaced apart from the front surface 331b. is provided. The facing portion 605 is formed in an arcuate shape protruding forward, like the facing portion 453 in the modified example of the second embodiment.

As shown in the enlarged view, the upper end portion 605a of the facing portion 605 (in other words, the lower end portion of the first guide portion 603 on the game board 24 side (the back side of the pachinko machine 10)) is positioned so that the opening/closing member 331 is in the closed position. In the positioned state, it is positioned above the upper end portion 331d of the opening/closing member 331 . Furthermore, the curvature of the facing portion 605 is substantially the same as the curvature of the trajectory of one point on the upper end portion 331 d of the opening/closing member 331 . Accordingly, interference between the first guide portion 603 and the opening/closing member 331 can be suppressed without providing a notch or the like in the opening/closing member 331 .

According to the present embodiment, each guide of the game ball above the opening and closing member 331 and in front of the opening and closing member 331 can be continued, and the game ball passing between the first and second game nails 281 and 282 can be continuously guided. can be suitably guided to the lower working port 305 . In addition, since the members for each guide are integrally formed, the strength and rigidity of the guide structure in front of the opening/closing member 331 can be increased. In addition, the strength and rigidity of the opening/closing member 331 can be increased by providing a configuration in which the opening/closing member 331 is not provided with a notch or the like.

Also, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, only the opening/closing member 331 is displaced, and the first guide portion 603 is immovable. For this reason, the first guide part 603 can be extended forward within a range that does not come into contact with the window panel 62, and the distance from the window panel 62 can be easily made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the first guide portion 603 in front of the opening/closing member 331, and the game ball can be properly guided.

Also in the prize winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. When guided and the electric accessory 307 is in the open state, the game balls on the first to third flow-down paths R1 to R3 can win the upper operation opening 303. Therefore, the same effects as those of the above embodiments can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the upper end 605a of the facing portion 605 is positioned below the upper end 331d of the opening/closing member 331, as in the modification of the second embodiment (FIG. 46). The opening/closing member 331 may be provided with an insertion portion (notch or the like) through which the guide portion 603 is inserted. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easy to increase the drooping length of the first guide portion 603 . As a result, the distance between the first guide portion 603 and the lower operation opening 305 can be easily shortened, and the guidance of the game ball in front of the opening/closing member 331 can be easily stabilized.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 when the support state is the first high winning support state is different from the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the variable display time of the second special figure game performed in the second result display section BS is the result that the second special figure game is out of the normal (reach does not occur). ), it is configured to be uniformly set to 7 sec. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state according to the present embodiment takes into consideration the variable display time in the case where the game round of the second special figure corresponds to the normal deviation result. is set. The same open pattern will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, in the first high winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed three times from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 3 seconds have elapsed, and the remaining two openings are performed until 1 second has elapsed each time. In addition, when the number of winning prizes to the upper operation port 303 reaches 10 from the start of the support state, the support state ends at that point.

A closing period (first standby period) between the first opening and the second opening is set to 5.5 seconds. That is, the period from the start of the first release to the start of the second release (the sum of the first release period (3 sec) and the first standby period (5.5 sec)) is set to 8.5 sec. , and is longer than the variable display time (7 sec) when the game round of the second special figure corresponds to the normal deviation result. As a result, the variable display of the second special figure game cycle corresponding to the first winning to the upper operation port 303 can be ended before the start of the second opening.

Furthermore, the closing period (second standby period) between the second opening and the third opening is set to 6.5 seconds. That is, the period from the start of the second release to the start of the third release (the sum of the second release period (1 sec) and the second waiting period (6.5 sec)) is set to 7.5 sec. , which is longer than the variable display time (7 sec). As a result, the variable display of the second special figure game cycle corresponding to the second winning to the upper operation port 303 can be ended before the third opening is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 will be described in this embodiment.

<General game state transition processing>
FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing normal figure game state transition processing executed by MPU 202 of main controller 81 in the present embodiment.

In the general pattern game state transition processing of the present embodiment, similarly to the general pattern game state transition processing (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the support state is in step S1201, If it is not in the support state, the processing of steps S1202 to S1205 is executed. Then, when it is determined in step S1205 that the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the high-frequency support mode, in step S1207, "2 ” is set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is released.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (it is the low-frequency support mode), the process proceeds to step S2101, and it is determined whether the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high winning support state. do.

If the support state is the first high winning support state, "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S2012. On the other hand, if the support state is not the first high prize support state (the low prize support state), "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S2103.

After executing the processing of step S1207, step S2102, or step S2103, the processing of steps S1208 and S1209 is sequentially executed, and this state transition processing ends. Incidentally, if it is determined that in the support state in step S1201, the processing of steps S1210 to S1214 is executed in the same manner as the normal game state transition processing (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment, and then , terminates this state transition processing.

<Accessory opening/closing process>
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the accessory opening/closing process executed by MPU 202 of main controller 81 in this embodiment.

In the accessory opening/closing process of the present embodiment, similarly to the accessory opening/closing process (FIG. 29) according to the first embodiment, it is determined in step S1301 whether or not the electric accessory 307 is being opened. However, if it is not open, the processing of steps S1302 to S1304 is executed. After execution of the accessory release process of step S1304, the setting process for each round is executed in step S1305.

Here, setting processing for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the setting process for each round, as in the setting process for each round (FIG. 30) according to the first embodiment, first, in step S1401, the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is set to the high-frequency support mode. Determine whether or not there is If it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high winning support state. If it is determined to be in the first high winning support state, the process advances to step S2301 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "3", that is, whether or not it is the first opening. do. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "3", the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is set to "1500" in step S2302, and the upper limit of the first opening is set. Set 3 sec as the period. In the subsequent step S2304, the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is set to "10", the upper limit of the winning number to the upper working port 303 is set to 10, and the number of winnings for each round is set. End the setting process.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "3", it means that it is the second or third opening. In this case, in step S2305, "500" is set in the second timer area T2, and 1 sec is set as the upper limit of the open period. After that, the setting process for each round ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1402 that the support state of the electric accessory 307 is not in the first high winning support state, then in steps S1405 and S1406, the upper limit of the open period is set to 0.2 sec, and the upper operating port 303 The upper limit of the number of prizes to be won is set to 3, respectively, and the setting process for each round is terminated.

Also, if the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is high-frequency support at step S1401, it means that the support state is the second high prize support state. The upper limit of the open period of the electric accessory 307 in the support state is set to 2 seconds, and the upper limit of the number of winning prizes to the upper operation port 303 is set to 10, respectively, and the setting process for each round is completed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 56, after executing the process of step S2201, after executing the setting process of the normal figure open command of step S1306, the accessory opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1301 that the electric accessory 307 is being opened, after executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1312, in step S1313, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". Determine whether or not there is If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0", in step S2202 it is determined whether the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the high frequency support mode, that is, the support state is the second high winning support state. It is determined whether or not. In the high frequency support mode, "100" is set in the second timer area T2, and 0.2 sec is set as the standby period.

If it is not in the high frequency support mode at step S2202, it means that the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high winning support state. ” is determined. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "2", in step S2205, "2750" is set in the second timer area T2, and the first waiting period (between the first and second opening 5.5 sec is set as the waiting period for On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2204 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "2", then in step S2206 "3250" is set in the second timer area T2, and the second waiting period (second 6.5 sec is set as the waiting period between opening and third opening).

After execution of the process of step S2203, step S2205, or step S2206, after performing the setting process of the normal figure close command in step S1315, the accessory opening/closing process is complete|finished.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state will be described with reference mainly to FIG. Here, it is assumed that the game round of the first special figure is not performed during the period from the start of opening the electric accessory 307 for the first time to the end of the first high winning support state.

In FIG. 58, at timing t21, when a prize to the through gate 35 occurs, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor. is executed. This variable display continues for 20 seconds.

Although illustration is omitted, also in the present embodiment, if the result of the normal drawing lottery is the result of shifting to the first high winning support state, the winning unit 301 starts 3 seconds before the end of the variable display. A special light emission effect is started by the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 (see FIG. 37 and the like). In addition, a special display effect B1 (character display such as "Aim for the electric chew!") is started on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 from 2 seconds before switching to the open state of the electric accessory 307 ( See FIG. 40, etc.).

After that, when the first opening is performed at the electric accessory 307 at the timing t22, the first game ball enters the upper operation opening 303 at the timing t23 immediately after that, and accordingly the second result display unit The variable display of the game times of the second special figure is started at the BS. In this case, if the result of the winning lottery for the second special symbol based on the winning is a normal loss result, the second special symbol game cycle continues for 7 seconds from the start of the variable display.

In addition, while the upper limit period of the first opening of the electric accessory 307 is set to 3 sec, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 sec, four game balls following the first game ball Balls win prizes one by one, and five game balls win prizes in total. With the winning of the second and subsequent game balls, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure (the number of information stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb of the RAM 204) increases in order, and the number of reserved memories is the fifth. The number of game balls is 4 when the game ball wins.

At timing t24, when 3 seconds have passed since the opening of the electric accessory 307, the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state. This closed state continues until the first waiting period (5.5 sec) elapses.

On the other hand, at the timing t25, when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the game round of the second special figure, the variable display of the game round ends, and the stop result is displayed over the stop display period of 0.5 sec. be. When the display of the stop result ends, at timing t26, the variable display of the game round based on the winning of the second game ball to the upper operation opening 303, that is, the game round of the next second special figure is started. Along with this, the number of pending memories of the second special figure is reduced by one to three, and one margin is generated with respect to the upper limit number (four).

After that, at timing t27, the first standby period elapses, and along with this, the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state again. Since this second opening continues for 1 sec, one game ball enters the upper operation opening 303 at timing t28 while the electric accessory 307 is in the open state. As a result, the number of reserved storage of the second special figure increases by one and reaches the upper limit number again.

Furthermore, after that, at timing t29, the number of pending memories of the second special symbol is reduced by one as the variable display of the second special symbol based on the third winning is started. Then, by starting the third release at timing t30, one game ball wins again (timing t31), and the number of storage of the second special figure pending information reaches the upper limit number.

In addition, in FIG. 58, the game round of the second special figure corresponds to the normal deviation result (no reach), and the fluctuation display time is 7 sec, but the game of the second special figure When the time corresponds to the result of reach-to-reach (occurrence of reach), the variable display time is longer than that corresponding to the result of normal failure, and is set to, for example, 12 seconds. When the game round corresponding to the winning of the first game ball is the one corresponding to the winning reach result, the game round ends after the electric accessory 307 is opened for the second time. For this reason, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is maintained at the upper limit number during the second opening, and even if the winning to the upper operation port 303 occurs in the second opening, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure cannot be increased. That is, depending on the selection mode of the game round of the second special figure, it is different whether or not the number of reserved memories of the second special figure can be increased in the second release. By the way, as the game times of the second special figure, those corresponding to the normal out result are more likely to be selected than those corresponding to the out reach result.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the first high winning port state, when a game ball wins in the upper operation port 303 while the electric role product 307 is opened for the first time, the second electric role product 307 is opened after the game round corresponding to the winning is completed. configured to be open.

For example, when a game ball wins in the upper operation port 303 by opening the first time, the game round corresponding to the winning is continued until the end of the first high winning port state. From the start to the end of the first high winning port state, no new empty area is generated in the second result display portion reservation area Rb (second special figure reservation area) of the RAM 204 . For this reason, it is assumed that the player's interest in winning the operation port 303 will fade after the number of pending second special symbols reaches the upper limit during the transition to the first high winning port state. Furthermore, since a new empty area does not occur in the second result display unit reservation area Rb, at most, the execution amount of the second special figure lottery based on the first winning and the number of second special figure reservations There is also a concern that only the total number of lottery opportunities (5 times) can be obtained with the upper limit of .

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the upper operation port 303 during the opening of the electric accessory 307 for the first time, before the start of the second opening, the game corresponding to the winning It is possible to end a round and start the next game round. As a result, it is possible to start the second opening after increasing the empty area of the second result display portion reservation area Rb, and the player is motivated to win the upper opening 303 during the second opening. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in winning the upper working port 303 throughout the first high winning port state. Furthermore, it is possible to acquire the number of lottery opportunities that exceeds the sum of the number of executions of the winning lottery of the second special symbol based on the first winning and the upper limit number of the reserved number of the second special symbol. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to enter many game balls into the upper operation hole 303 during the first high winning port state is enhanced, and the interest of the first high winning port state is improved.

The release pattern of the first high winning support state in the low frequency support mode is configured as described above. In the high-frequency support mode, the short intervals of the second high winning support state are likely to be repeated, so even if the number of wins in the winning lottery of the second special figure is small in one second high winning support state, the shortfall is compensated. The player's psychology works that it should be compensated for in the next second high prize winning support state. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the period from the end of the support state to the occurrence of the next support state tends to be long, and it is difficult to expect a lottery opportunity to be replenished. Therefore, unlike the case of the high-frequency support mode, there is a strong need to acquire more chances of lottery in one support state. In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode, the first high winning support state in which the electric accessory 307 is opened three times as one set occurs, and it is during the opening of the electric accessory 307 for the first time. When the game ball wins in the upper operation port 303, the electric accessory 307 is opened for the second time after the game round corresponding to the win is finished. As a result, it is possible to maximize the chances of winning or losing the second special prize lottery in the low-frequency support mode, and effectively enhance the attractiveness of the first high prize-winning support state.

The period from the start of the first opening to the start of the second opening is a longer period (8 .5 sec), and the first standby period is set to a period (5.5 sec) shorter than the variable display time. In this case, when a game ball wins in the upper operation port 303 within 1 sec from the start of the first opening, the game round corresponding to the winning becomes easier to end before the start of the second opening, and the prize is won after 1 sec. In this case, it becomes difficult for the game cycle corresponding to the winning to end before the start of the second opening. In other words, the ease of ending the game cycle before the start of the second opening differs depending on the winning timing to the upper operation port 303 . As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to win a prize early after the first opening is added, and the amusement is improved.

The period from the start of the first opening to the start of the second opening is longer than the variable display time of the second special game times corresponding to the normal failure result, and the second special game times corresponding to the failure reach result. The period was set to be shorter than the fluctuation display time of In this case, the easiness of ending the game round before the start of the second opening differs depending on whether the game round corresponding to the normal loss result or the loss reach result is selected as the game round of the second special figure. becomes. Monotonousness of the game is suppressed as compared with the case where the game round is always finished before the start of the second opening, and attention to the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, if the game round of the second special figure corresponds to the result of reaching out, it is assumed that the player is paying attention to the reaching effect performed on the display screen G, so the second special figure (In other words, even if the meaning of winning the game ball in the upper operation opening 303 is diminished), it is considered that the inconvenience in the game performance is unlikely to occur.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the mode of the special display effect performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 is different from the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this embodiment, a first special display effect S1 shown in FIG. 59(a) and a second special display effect S2 shown in FIG. 59(b) are set as special display effects. These first and second special display effects S1 and S2 are performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state.

The first special display effect S1 is the same as the special display effect (FIG. 40(a)) of the first embodiment. A predetermined image such as a character display 381 saying "Aim for the electric chew!" is displayed. On the other hand, the second special display effect S2 is for prompting the player to wait or stop the shooting of the game ball. A predetermined image such as a character display 701 is displayed. These first and second special display effects S1 and S2 are based on the state of holding the second special figure at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 (storage state of information in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 204). Can be used properly.

Next, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 when the support state is the first high winning support state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60(a).

In the opening pattern of the present embodiment, the number of opening times of the electric accessory 307, the upper limit of the opening period of each time, the opening period and the ending period are the opening pattern of the first high winning support state according to the fifth embodiment ( 54). On the other hand, the closing period (first waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening and the waiting period (second waiting period) between the second opening and the third opening are the same as in the fifth implementation. It is different from the case of morphology. Specifically, each of the first and second standby periods is lengthened by 2 sec.

The relationship between the opening pattern and the special display effects will be described with reference to FIG. 60(b).

From the start of the opening period at timing t41 to the end of the first opening at timing t42, the first special display effect S1 is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁At timing t42, as the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state, the execution mode of the special display effect is changed, and the first special display effect S1 is switched to the second special display effect S2.

At timing t43, which is 2 seconds before the start of the second opening, the hold status of the second special figure is grasped, and depending on the grasped result, switching from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1 is performed. , to continue the second special display effect S2. When switching to the first special display effect S1 has been performed, switching to the second special display effect S2 is performed again as the second opening ends at timing t44.

At the timing t45, which is 2 seconds before the start of the third opening, similarly to the above, the state of holding the second special figure is grasped, and according to the grasping result, the second special display effect S2 is changed to the first special display effect S1. It is selected whether to switch or to continue the second special display effect S2. After that, with the end of the third opening at timing t46, the special display effect ends and the special ending effect B2 (FIG. 40(a)) is executed.

Next, in this embodiment, each control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment.

<Processing during support state>
FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing processing during the support state executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 . It should be noted that this process is executed in the support state process in step S2011 of the support state process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. is an open result (transition result to the support state) and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed.

In the support state process, first, at step S2401, it is determined whether or not the first high winning support command (see step S1110 in FIG. 27) from the main controller 81 has been received. If the first high winning prize support command has not been received, the processing during the support state is terminated. It is determined whether or not an open command (see step S1306 in FIG. 29) has been received, and it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 has been switched from the closed state to the open state.

When the normal figure open command is received, that is, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, the round counter SRC2 of the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. This round counter SRC2 is for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened in the first high winning support state.

In the subsequent step S2404, it is determined whether or not the standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244. FIG. The standby flag indicates that the electric accessory 307 is in the standby period. This standby flag is stored in the flag storage area 247 when it is grasped that the electric accessory 307 is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the electric accessory 307 is switched from the closed state to the open state. When it is determined that the flag is stored, the flag storage area 247 is erased.

If the standby flag is stored, the standby flag stored in the flag storage area 247 is erased in step S2405. After the execution of step S2405, or when negative determination is made in steps S2402 and S2404, in step S2406, it is determined whether or not the normal figure closing command (see step S1315 in FIG. 29) from the main controller 81 is received. Then, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 has been switched from the open state to the closed state.

When the normal figure closing command is received, that is, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state, in step S2407, whether or not the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is "3", that is, , determines whether the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the closed state corresponds to the third (last) end of opening. If the value of the round counter is not "3" and the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the closed state corresponds to the end of the first or second opening, in step S2408, the first special display effect S1 is executed. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle.

When the first special display effect S1 is being executed, in order to switch the special display effect to the second special display effect S2, a process for performing the second special display effect S2 is executed in step S2409. In this step, a command including information on the content of the second special display effect S2 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the second special display effect S2 from the character ROM 256, and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. . In the following step S2410, the standby flag is stored in various flag storage area 247 of RAM244.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2407 that the value of the round counter SRC2 is "3", that is, if the switching to the closed state of the electric accessory 307 corresponds to the end of the third opening, the process proceeds to step S2411. to clear the value of the round counter SRC2 to "0".

After execution of steps S2410 and S2411, or if a negative determination is made in step S2406, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not a standby flag is stored in the flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244. FIG. If the standby flag is not stored, the process during the support state is terminated. If the standby flag is stored, the process during the standby period is executed in step S2413 and then the process during the support state is terminated.

Here, the processing during the standby period in step S2413 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the waiting period process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is "1", that is, the current waiting period is the first time between the first opening and the second opening. It is determined whether or not it is the waiting period. If the value of the round counter SRC2 is "1" and it is during the first standby period, whether or not it is the first specific timing (see FIG. 60(b)), that is, the second special display effect S2 to the second It is determined whether or not the timing for switching to the 1 special display effect S1 has come. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 5.5 seconds have passed since the end of the first opening of the electric accessory 307 (in other words, the start of the first waiting period).

Here, the MPU 242 measures the elapsed time from the end of the first opening using the elapsed counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 . Specifically, the counting process of the above-described progress counter is started based on the receipt of the normal figure closing command, and the count value is incremented by 1 at a predetermined period (for example, 2 msec) (updated). In step S2502, the arrival of the first specific timing is determined by referring to the value of the elapsed counter.

As a result, when it is determined that it is not the first specific timing, the processing during the waiting period is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the first specific timing, in step S2503, grasp the number of pending memories of the second special figure (second starting pending memory number RbN), and the number is 4 (upper limit number) Determine whether or not it has been reached. In this step, the second secondary side reservation area 250b provided in the reservation storage area 250 (FIG. 32) of the RAM 244 is referred to, and the number of reservation storage of the second special figure is grasped.

If the number of pending memories of the second special figure is not four, in step S2504, the process for performing the first special display effect S1 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is executed, and then during the standby period End the process. In step S2504, a command including information on the content of the first special display effect S1 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the first special display effect S1 from the character ROM 256, and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. .

On the other hand, in step S2503, if it is determined that the number of pending memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit number, in step S2505, the game round of the first special figure is being executed (during variable display or stop display medium). In this step, after receiving a special figure variation command for the lower operation port 305 from the main control device 81 (see step S613 in FIG. 22), a special figure variation end command for the lower operation port 305 (step S409 in FIG. 20) is received, it is determined whether or not the game round of the first special figure is being executed.

When the game round of the first special figure is being executed, at step S2506, based on the information regarding the variation display time included in the special figure variation command, the remaining variation of the first special figure until the end of the variation display Understand display time (including pause display duration). On the other hand, if the game round of the first special figure is not being executed, it means that the game round of the second special figure is being executed. The remaining variable display time of the second special figure until the end of the variable display is grasped based on the information about the variable display time included in the.

After step S2506 or step S2507 is executed, in step S2508, the second It is determined whether or not the game round of the special figure is started. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation period ascertained in steps S2506 and S2507 is shorter than 3 seconds.

If it is determined that a new game round of the second special figure is started within 3 seconds in step S2508, although the number of pending memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit number of four at the first specific timing , It means that the number of reserved storage of the second special figure becomes 3 during the open period immediately after that, and one free area is generated. In this case, the process advances to step S2509 to execute processing for performing the first special display effect S1. In this step, control is performed so that the first special display effect S1 is executed with a delay of 0.5 sec compared to the case of step S2504. This is based on the fact that the timing of generating an empty area is delayed compared to the case where the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has not reached the upper limit number at the time of the first specific timing, leading to the winning of the upper work opening 303 It is for suppressing the shooting of game balls that do not stick.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2508 that the game round of the second special figure is not started within 3 seconds, the processing during the waiting period is terminated as it is so as to continue the execution of the second special display effect S2.

If it is determined in step S2501 that the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is not "1", it means that the current waiting period is the second waiting period between the second opening and the third opening. In this case, the process advances to step S2510 to determine whether it is the second specific timing (see FIG. 60(b)), that is, whether it is time to switch from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 6.5 seconds have passed since the end of the second opening of the electric accessory 307 (in other words, the start of the second waiting period). If it is determined that it is the second specific timing, the process proceeds to step S2503 and subsequent steps, and if it is determined that it is not the second specific timing, the process during the standby period is terminated.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG.

<Case 1>
As case 1, the case where the number of pending memories of the second special figure has not reached the upper limit number at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG.

In the case of FIG. 63, the game round of the first special symbol is not executed at the start of the opening for the first time, and the game of the second special symbol is immediately played along with the winning of the first game ball to the upper operation port 303. times are executed. This game round corresponds to the normal result, and its variable display time is set to 7 seconds.

At timing t51, the first special display effect S1 is displayed on the display screen G when the opening period related to the first high winning support state is started. The player is prompted to aim at the electric accessory 307 and shoot the game ball by visually recognizing the first special display effect S1. As a result, as described in the first embodiment, five game balls can win the upper operation opening 303 during the first opening of the electric accessory 307, and the second special figure is reserved memory. The number reaches 4 (upper limit).

At timing t52, the electric accessary 307 is opened for the first time and the first standby period starts, and the second special display effect S2 is displayed on the display screen G. The player is prompted to wait (stop) the player's shooting by visually recognizing the second special display effect S2. As a result, the shooting of game balls is suppressed when the electric accessory 307 is closed.

After that, when the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is completed, the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the second prize is started at timing t53. Along with this, the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is reduced by one, and an empty area for one is generated in the second result display portion reserved area Rb of the RAM 204 .

Then, when it comes to the timing t54 (first specific timing) 2 seconds before the second opening of the electric accessary 307, the holding status of the second special figure is grasped. Since the reserved storage number is not four, the first special display effect S1 is executed, and the special display effect on the display screen G is switched from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1. The player is prompted to aim at the electric accessory 307 and shoot the game ball by visually recognizing the first special display effect S1. As a result, one game ball can win the upper operation opening 303 during the second opening of the electric accessory 307, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure becomes four again.

At timing t55, the electric accessary 307 is opened for the second time and the second standby period starts, and the second special display effect S2 is displayed on the display screen G. In addition, if the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the second prize corresponds to the normal loss result and the fluctuation display time is 7 sec, at the timing t56, it corresponds to the third prize. The game round of the second special symbol is started, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol becomes three.

When it comes to timing t57 (second specific timing) 2 seconds before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of pending memories of the second special figure is grasped. Since the reserved memory number is not 4, the first special display effect S1 is executed, and the shooting of the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307 is encouraged. As a result, one game ball can win the upper operation opening 303 during the third opening of the electric accessory 307, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure becomes four again. This makes it possible to end the first high prize winning support state in a state in which the reserve storage of the second special figure is filled.

<Case 2>
Next, as case 2, the case where the number of pending memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG.

When the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit at the first specific timing, the variable display time of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is long, or the electric role At the start of the first release of the object 307, the game round of the first special figure is being executed, and it is assumed that the start of the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize will be delayed. . FIG. 64 exemplifies the case where the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning corresponds to the win reach result, and the variable display time is set to 12 sec.

When it comes to the timing t62 (first specific timing) 2 sec before the second opening of the electric accessary 307, the number of pending memories of the second special figure is grasped. In the case of FIG. 64, since the game cycle corresponding to the first winning to the upper operation port 303 continues for 12 seconds, the period from the start of the first standby period (timing t61) to timing t62 In, the game round of the second special figure is not started. For this reason, the number of pending memories of the second special figure, if four at the start of the first waiting period, will also be four at timing t62. Further, in the case of FIG. 64, the game round of the second special figure is not started within 3 sec from the timing t62, and the second special figure is not started until the timing t64 when the electric accessory 307 is opened for the second time. , the number of pending memories continues to be four.

In this case, the first special display effect S1 is not executed, and the second special display effect S2 is continuously displayed. That is, the first special display effect S1 is not executed even when the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 arrives. As a result, even when the electric accessory 307 is opened for the second time, in a situation where the number of reserved memories of the second special figure cannot be increased, it is possible to prompt the user to wait for the launch of the game ball. .

In addition, at the timing t64 (second specific timing) 2 seconds before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, since the number of pending memories of the second special figure is not four, the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 arrives. Along with this, the first special display effect S1 is executed.

<Case 3>
Next, as Case 3, another example in which the number of pending memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 65, the game round of the first special figure is being executed at the start of the first opening of the electric accessory 307, and the start of the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is delayed. exemplifies the case. In addition, the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize corresponds to the normal loss result, and its variable display time is set to 7 sec.

In the case of FIG. 65, the game round of the first special figure is executed until the middle of the first opening period of the electric accessory 307, so that the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is played. The start timing (timing t71) is shifted to the latter half of the open period. As a result, at timing t74, which is one second before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, the second special figure game cycle corresponding to the second winning is started.

In this case, at the timing t72 (first specific timing) which is 2 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is 4, but the timing when the second opening ends from this timing Until t75, the number of reserved storage of the second special figure is reduced by one and a free area is generated. In this case, since the game round of the second special figure is started within 3 sec from the first specific timing, the first special display effect S1 is executed. As a result, even if there is no margin in the number of reserved memories of the second special figure at the first specific timing, when there is a margin in the number of reserved memories of the second special figure by the end of the second opening, to the upper operation port 303 can be encouraged to win prizes.

In addition, the first special display effect S1 in this case is performed at timing t73 after 0.5 seconds from the first specific timing (the execution timing of the first special display effect S1). Compared to the case of FIG. 63, since there is a margin in the reserved memory number of the second special figure with a delay, by delaying the display timing of the first special display effect S1, there is a margin in the reserved memory number of the second special figure. The shooting (consumption) of game balls is suppressed until .

In addition, at the timing t76 (second specific timing) 2 seconds before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, since the number of pending memories of the second special figure is not four, the execution timing of the original first special display effect S1 At (timing t76), the first special display effect S1 is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A special display effect corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the electric accessory 307 is performed, and the mode of the special display effect is configured to be changeable according to the pending state of the second special figure.

In order to efficiently enter the game ball into the upper operation opening 303 for the convenience that the second special figure is judged within the range of the upper limit number of the second special figure, the electric accessory 307 is in the open state. It is desirable to enter the game ball into the upper operation opening 303 when it is switched and the number of memories in the second result display portion reservation area Rb is less than the upper limit number, and refrain from entering the ball in other cases. Become. However, if the player tries to make such a distinction by the player's judgment, the player will have to pay attention not only to the state of the electric accessory 307 but also to the number of pending second special symbols. It tends to be distracted.

In this respect, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a special display effect having a correlation with both the switching to the open state of the electric accessory 307 and the holding state of the second special figure. Therefore, even if the player himself/herself does not grasp the switching situation of the electric accessory 307 and the holding situation of the second special figure, if he proceeds with the game with reference to the special display effect, he/she can understand those situations. You can play games naturally. As a result, distraction of attention is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase concentration on the game. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the special display effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

As a special display effect, a first special display effect S1 in a mode of suggesting to the player that the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state or prompting the player to aim at the electric accessory 307; A second special display performance S2 in a mode of prompting the player to wait for the game or stop shooting the game balls is set, and these performances are selectively used. As a result, the player's firing operation can be assisted by the special display effect, making it easier to play a game suitable for each situation of the holding status of the electric accessory 307 and the second special figure.

The configuration is such that the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 is set before switching the electric accessory 307 to the open state. As a result, the player can grasp the first special display effect S1 in advance, and can shoot the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307 at an appropriate timing. On top of that, it is configured to grasp the pending status of the second special figure at the execution timing, and to switch whether or not to execute the first special display effect S1 based on the grasped result. In this case, it is possible to make a notification that reflects the latest pending status, and it is possible to increase the reliability and interest in the special display effect.

A special display effect is performed in the standby period (opening period, first standby period, second standby period) immediately before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state. As a result, the special display effect can be utilized as one effect in the first high winning support state, and it is possible to make a notification according to the execution mode of the most recent open state.

Even if the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit number at the execution timing (first specific timing, second specific timing) of the first special display effect S1, before switching control of the electric accessory 307 ends When the number of pending memories of the second special figure decreases, the configuration is such that the first special display effect S1 is executed. As a result, even if there is no margin in the holding state of the second special symbol at the execution timing of the first special display performance S1, if there is a margin until the end of the switching control, notification is made based on that. can be done. As a result, it is possible to favorably assist the efficient entry of the ball into the upper working opening 303, thereby improving the amusement.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, winning to the upper operation opening 303 is disabled. For example, the opening/closing members 331 and 511 may not completely close the upper working port 303 but may be half-open. In short, it suffices if the easiness of winning to the upper operation opening 303 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the plate-shaped opening/closing member 331 stands up at the closed position as the "variable receiving means" and rotates forward from the closed position to displace to the open position. 307, it may have other configurations such as a side opening type or a front/rear sliding type. That is, the configuration of the electric accessory is arbitrary as long as the receiving area can be formed on the first flow path R1 when switched to the open state.

In addition, as the side-opening type electric accessory, there is a protruding part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and has an opening as a ball entry part, and an axis line that is provided in the protruding part and extends in a direction intersecting the game board. and a movable blade as a movable body that rotates about the center, and the rotation of the movable blade changes the degree of opening of the opening, and the opening state (the first opening that allows or easily receives the game ball into the ball entrance portion). state) and a closed state (a second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted by the entering ball portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state). In this configuration, in many cases, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to flow down in front of the electric accessory (protruding portion). , the entire electric accessory including the movable blade and the projecting portion is withdrawn from the first flow-down route R1, and only the movable blade intersects the first flow-down route R1 when the movable blade is displaced to the open position. do it.

In addition, as the front-rear slide type electric accessory, there is a protruding part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and has an opening as a ball-entering part that opens upward, and a movable plate as a movable body that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. , wherein the movable plate is retracted from an advanced position covering the opening from above to a retracted position where the area covering the opening is reduced to expand the degree of opening, thereby forming a receiving area and forming a closed state (entering). A second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted or is difficult to accept in the ball portion) to an open state (a first state in which a game ball can be accepted in the ball entering portion or is easier to accept than the second state). In this configuration, it is preferable that the receiving area is formed on the first flow-down route R1 when viewed from above.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the electric accessory 307 and the lower operation opening 305 are arranged vertically, but they may be arranged diagonally. As long as the electric accessory 307 is located upstream of the lower operation port 305 and the receiving area RA is formed on the first flow-down route R1, the arrangement direction of these is arbitrary.

(4) The lateral width (size of the receiving area RA) of the opening/closing member 331 is set to the length of about three game balls, and is larger than the lateral width (size of the lower actuation port 305) of the lower actuation port 305. It may be configured such that only the game balls flowing down the first flow-down path can be awarded to the upper operation port 303 by making both equal.

In addition, in the configuration in which game balls flowing down a flow-down path other than the first flow-down path R1 can also enter the upper operation port 303, the lateral width of the opening/closing member 331 is at least twice the lateral width of the lower operation port 305, and It is preferable to make it 5 times or less. By doubling or more, game balls other than the game balls on the first flow-down route R1 can be included in the winning objects to the upper operation port 303. - 特許庁Moreover, the following effect is expected by making it 5 times or less. If the size exceeds 5 times, it becomes too easy to win a prize in the upper activation port 303, and as a result, the frequency of switching to the open state has to be reduced due to the specifications of the gaming machine. In this regard, with the above configuration, it is possible to moderately limit the winning of prizes to the upper operation opening 303, and it is possible to appropriately ensure the frequency of switching to the open state. Furthermore, as a result of the increase in the occupation ratio in the game area, there is a possibility that restrictions on the area where the game balls flow down and the installation area of other game parts will be strengthened. can be configured.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state, the game balls flowing down the second and third flow paths R2 and R3 do not enter the lower operation opening 305. However, it may be configured to allow a prize to be won. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which winning is less likely than the game balls flowing down the first flow path R1.

(6) In the above-described third embodiment, the opening/closing member 511 is linearly moved back and forth. to the open position. In this case, the second guide portion 503 inserted through the through-hole 517 may be curved in a forwardly convex arc shape when viewed from the side (as seen in the axial direction of the rotation shaft). As a result, interference between the opening/closing member 511 and the second guide portion 503 can be alleviated, making it possible to reduce the size of the through hole 517 and increase the rigidity and strength of the opening/closing member 511 .

In such a configuration, it is preferable that the first guide portion 365 hang down to the front of the opening/closing member 511 and the lower end portion thereof is arcuate like the second guide portion 503 . That is, by configuring the first guide portion 365 in the same manner as the first guide portion 603 according to the fourth embodiment, the distance between the first guide portion 365 and the second guide portion 503 (distance in FIG. 7) L6) can be easily retracted, and game balls are prevented from spilling out from between the two guide portions 365 and 503.

Further, in embodiments other than the above-described third embodiment, the opening/closing member 331 may linearly move back and forth.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the pair of left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503 are provided as the "regulating means" or "guide means", but only one of them may be provided. However, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in consideration of the regulation of the suitable flow-down direction of the game ball and the guidance of the game ball. The same applies to the first guide portions 365 and 603 as well.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the first guide portions 365 and 603 are configured by continuous walls extending in the guide direction, but all or part of the first guide portions may be configured by a plurality of game nails. In this case, the plurality of game nails should be arranged in the guide direction so that the distance between them is less than the diameter of the game ball. According to this configuration, in the process of guiding the game ball, the game ball comes into contact with the game nail, thereby making it easier for the game ball to flow down, and the period until it reaches the lower operation opening 305 or the receiving area RA is increased. It becomes easy to prolong. As a result, the visibility of the movement of the game ball is enhanced, and it becomes easier to perform effects utilizing the above period, thereby improving the interest.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503 and the first guide portion 603 have the same length (vertical width). can be different. In this case, the long side second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503 and the first guide portion 603 may be bent from the middle position to change the flowing direction of the game ball. This also applies to the first guide portion 365 .

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503 and the first guide portion 603 have the same amount of protrusion. good. This also applies to the first guide portion 365 .

(11) In the first embodiment, the second guide portion 371 is formed integrally with the opening/closing member 331, and in the second and third embodiments, the second guide portions 403, 451, 503 are the upper guides. Although formed integrally with the passage 333, the second guide portion may be formed separately from the opening/closing member 331 and the upper guide passage 333, and may be connected to them by using an engaging portion or a fastener. In this case, for example, when the second guide part is damaged, such as when a part of the second guide part is lost due to the impact from the game ball, it is sufficient to replace the second guide part, which facilitates repair. However, considering the number of parts and the assembling workability at the time of manufacturing the game machine, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments.

(12) In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which part or all of the second guide portion 371 is accommodated (entered) into the lower operation opening 305 when the opening/closing member 331 is displaced to the open position. . In this case, restrictions on the opening degree of the opening/closing member 331 can be relaxed, making it easier to open the opening/closing member 331 to a large extent. It is also possible to reduce the distance between the opening/closing member 331 and the lower operation port case 337 to bring them closer together.

Further, in the first embodiment, the interval between the left and right second guide portions 371 is made larger than the left and right width of the lower operation opening case 337, and when the opening/closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, each of the second guide portions 371 A configuration in which the portions 371 enter the left and right outer sides of the lower operation port case 337 may be employed. With this configuration as well, restrictions on the opening degree of the opening/closing member 331 can be relaxed, making it easier to open the opening/closing member 331 to a large extent. It is also possible to reduce the distance between the opening/closing member 331 and the lower operation port case 337 to bring them closer together.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, no game nail is provided between the opening/closing member 331, 511 and the lower operating port case 337, but a game nail may be provided. In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, when the opening/closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, it is preferable to arrange two game nails side by side in the horizontal direction so that the left and right second guide portions 371 are accommodated therebetween. . In this case, if the game nails are excessively bent in the direction in which both of them approach each other, it interferes with the second guide part 371 and makes it difficult to properly operate the opening/closing member 331, so extreme bending of the nails is suppressed. . The game nails may be provided so that both of them are accommodated between the left and right second guide portions 371 .

(14) In the first embodiment, the second guide portion 371 is configured by a continuous wall extending in the guide direction, but a plurality of game nails may be used to configure all or part of the second guide portion. In this case, the plurality of game nails should be arranged in the guide direction so that the distance between them is less than the diameter of the game ball. In such a configuration, the game nail may be formed integrally with the opening/closing member 331 by using synthetic resin (the same material as the opening/closing member 331).

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the front surface 331b of the opening/closing member 331 positioned at the closed position is substantially flush with the front surface 320b of the base body 320. good too. Even in this case, when the game ball passes in front of the opening/closing member 331, it is prevented from being caught by the opening/closing member 331, thereby preventing the flow of the game ball from stagnating or damaging the opening/closing member 331.例文帳に追加

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first region in which the first guide portions 365 and 603 are provided and the first guide portions 365 and 603 are provided in the translucent portion 341 of the first light emitting portion 311. Although the light emission mode is made common with the second region that does not have a second region, the light emission mode of each region may be made different. That is, since the game ball cannot flow or is difficult to flow down in front of the first guide portions 365 and 603 , the light emission mode of the first region may be the same as that of the second light emission portion 317 . In this case, it is preferable to provide a light shielding member behind the translucent part 341 to suppress the light from the light emitter that emits light from the first region from entering the second region.

(17) In each of the embodiments described above, the second light emitting portion 317 is configured to protrude forward, but may be configured not to protrude. In this case, as with the translucent portion 341 of the first light emitting portion 311, the second light emitting portion 317 is configured such that its front surface is substantially flush with the base body 320, and the front of the second light emitting portion 317 is positioned in the game flow. can flow down.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the light emission modes of the first and second light emitting sections 311 and 317 are differentiated by the light emission control of the light emitting substrate 359, but the light emission modes may be differentiated according to the specifications of the light emitter. For example, as the light emitter for the second light emitter 317, a light emitter capable of emitting light with higher luminance than the light emitter for the first light emitter 311 is arranged. A configuration in which the light emitting mode is different may be employed.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball may flow at different speeds in front of the first light emitting portion 311 and in front of the opening/closing members 331 and 511 . Specifically, the game ball may flow faster in front of the opening/closing members 331 and 511 than in front of the first light emitting portion 311 . For example, a decelerating means for decelerating the game ball may be provided in front of the first light emitting portion 311 , but the decelerating means may not be provided in front of the opening/closing members 331 and 511 .

In the configuration in which the game ball flows down in front of the opening/closing members 331 and 511, if the flow of the game ball is stagnated in front of the opening/closing members 331 and 511, the game ball prevents the opening/closing members 331 and 511 from being displaced to the open position. there is a risk of being Therefore, by making it possible for the game ball to pass quickly in front of the opening/closing members 331 and 511, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed. On the other hand, by slowing down the flow of the game balls above the opening/closing members 331 and 511, the player can easily visually recognize the flow of the game balls toward the electric accessory 307 (upper operation opening 303). It is possible to effectively arouse expectation for the upstream game ball to enter the upper operation port 303.例文帳に追加

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of flow-down routes (first to third flow-down routes R1 to R3) that allow the game ball to win a prize in the upper operation port 303 are adjacent to each other, but each flow-down progress is dispersed. A configuration in which the paths are separated from each other may be adopted. In this case, it is preferable to provide notification means (first light emitting unit 311) for performing specific notification on each path. However, when there are three or more flow-down routes, it is not necessary to provide notification means for all flow-down routes, and it is sufficient to provide notification means on at least two routes.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls guided downward by the first guide portions 365 and 603 above the opening and closing members 331 and 511 (electric accessory 307) are guided downward by the opening and closing members 331 and 511. In front of the opening and closing members 331 and 511, although it is configured to guide downward in the same manner, changing means for changing the flowing direction of the game ball to the left and right is provided in front of the opening and closing members 331 and 511, and the game ball is played in front of the members 331 and 511. A configuration may be adopted in which the direction of flow of the ball is changed. As a result, the area in front of the electric accessory 307 can be utilized as a change area for changing the flowing direction of the game ball. In this case, compared to the structure in which the game ball simply flows down in front of the electric accessory 307, the movement of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest is improved.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball flows down in front of the first light emitting portion 311 (translucent portion 341) as the “notification means”. In addition to being able to display a specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the control, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down behind it, and the optical transparency is such that the back of the notification means can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. (transparency) may be used. As a notification means in this case, for example, an edge-light transmissive display using a light guide plate (light is irradiated from the end surface of the light guide plate in which predetermined unevenness (grooves) is formed on the front or rear surface, and the light is are reflected or refracted by the unevenness to irradiate the light forward and perform a predetermined light emitting display on the light guide plate), a transmissive liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel), or the like can be used. With this configuration as well, it is possible to grasp the specific notification while visually checking the flow of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, and the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be expected.

Further, in the above configuration, the configuration may be such that the game ball can flow down not only behind the notification means but also in front thereof. Since the space in the longitudinal direction can be effectively used, it is possible to substantially expand the flow area. In this case, for example, after providing a distribution means for distributing the game balls to the front side and the rear side upstream of the notification means, there are cases where the game balls flow down in front of the notification means and cases where they flow behind. , the easiness of winning to the upper operation opening 303 (the easiness of being picked up by the electric accessory 307) may be varied. As a result, the player enjoys whether the player passes in front of or behind the informing means, and the amusement is improved.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the electric accessory 307 is provided as the "variable receiving means", but the "variable receiving means" is not limited to opening and closing the upper operation opening (lottery opening for the second special prize) 303. , the special winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 31, and other ball entrances may be opened and closed. For example, when the variable winning device 32 that opens and closes the big winning port 32a is used as the "variable receiving means", the variable winning device 32 is arranged upstream of the lower operation port 305, and its receiving area is on the first flow path R1. It is good to set it as the structure formed. In this case, when the variable winning device 32 is switched to the open state in the open/close execution mode, the lower operation opening 305 prevents the winning of the big winning opening 32a.

In addition, in the configuration where the electric accessory that opens and closes other ball entrances such as the big winning mouth 32a and the general winning mouth 31 is the "variable receiving means", the downstream "ball entering part" is the first special figure. It is not limited to the lottery entrance, and may be other ball entrances such as the through gate 35, the general winning entrance 31, the second special prize lottery entrance, and the like. In this case, the downstream side "entering ball part" is not limited to one without an electric accessory, and may be one with an electric accessory.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the lower operation port 305 is provided as the downstream “ball entry portion”, but such “ball entry portion” is not limited to the lottery opening of the first special figure, and the through gate 35 and general Other ball entry openings such as the prize winning opening 31 may be used. Further, the downstream "entering ball portion" may be the big winning opening 32a, and may be provided with an electric accessory (variable winning device 32).

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first special figure is determined based on the winning of the lower opening 305, and the winning of the second special figure is determined based on the winning of the upper opening 303. However, even if the game ball wins in any of the two operation ports 303 and 305, it may be configured such that a common success/failure determination is performed. In this case, only one type of special symbol may be provided, or in a configuration including first and second special symbols, both operating ports 303 and 305 may correspond to one of the special symbols.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, it is more advantageous for the player to win the upper operating hole 303 than to win the lower operating hole 305, but the advantages of the operating holes 303 and 305 are equal You can do it, or you can reverse it. However, in order to increase the expectation of winning to the upper operation port 303 and enhance the attractiveness of the first high winning support state, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, the easiness of selection of the 15R jackpot (ratio of the 15R jackpot) when the jackpot is won is made different between the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 305 (see FIG. 15). , The upper operating port 303 is more advantageous for the player than the lower operating port 305, but after equalizing the easiness of selection of the 15R jackpot and the breakdown (privilege) of the jackpot type, after the opening and closing execution mode is finished A configuration may be adopted in which the superiority of the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 is differentiated by changing the transition rate (transition rate to the advantageous state) to the high-frequency support mode or the high-probability mode. In addition, the upper operating port 303 is more advantageous than the lower operating port 305 in terms of the ease of selection of the 15R jackpot and the breakdown of the jackpot types, and the upper operating port 303 is also more advantageous in the transition rate to the above-mentioned advantageous state. It is good also as a structure which has become.

(28) In each of the above-described embodiments, when winning either the upper operation opening 303 or the lower operation opening 305, a common winning table (Fig. 14 (a), (b)) is used to determine whether the special figure is valid However, it is also possible to separately provide win/fail tables for the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 so that the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 have different random numbers for winning the jackpot. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot may be the same for the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305, or may be different.

(29) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pending information in the second result display area Rb is preferentially targeted for success/failure determination over the pending information in the first result display area Ra. , and vice versa, or may be determined in order of winning (acquisition order). However, considering the superiority of the upper working port 303 in the type table for the second result display section (see FIG. 15(b)), the configuration of each of the above embodiments is preferable.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, the switching control of the electric accessory 307 is performed by the main control device 81, but other control devices (effect control device 82, display control device 212, payout control device 97, etc.) may be configured to be performed by

(31) In each of the above-described embodiments, pending information is acquired based on winnings to the upper working port 303, and the pending information is stored up to a predetermined number (four). It may be configured not to By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration. This is the same for each winning to the lower operation port 305 and the through gate 35 .

(32) In each of the above-described embodiments, up to four pieces of pending information based on winnings to the upper working port 303 are stored. may In this case, the upper limit of the opening period of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state (the opening period of the first opening if there are multiple openings) can be set according to the upper limit pending number. Specifically, it is preferable to set the period to be the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number and 0.6 sec, which is the firing cycle of the game ball. Also, the upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper operation port 303 in the first high winnings support state can also be set in accordance with the upper limit of the number of reserved prizes. Specifically, the added value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number may be used.

The upper limit of the number of pieces of pending information to be stored based on each winning to the lower opening 305 and the through gate 35 may be less than 4 or may be 5 or more. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the upper limit storage number of the pending information based on the winning to the operation ports 303, 305 and the through gate 35 is different.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are configured to start the special light emission effect three seconds before the start of the opening. The specific timing is arbitrary. For example, the period from the start of the special light emitting effect to the start of opening the electric accessory 307 may be shorter than the required period from the launch of the game ball until it reaches the electric accessory 307 . In this case, even if the game ball is shot after watching the special light emitting effect, it becomes difficult to win the game ball into the upper operation port 303 at the optimum timing for reaching the upper limit number of the reserved memory number of the second special figure, It is possible to suppress aiming. This is the same for the special display effect, and the execution timing of the special display effect may be before the electric accessory 307 is opened, and is not limited to 2 seconds before the opening of the electric accessory 307 starts.

(34) In each of the above embodiments, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the transition to the support state is caused by the first high prize-winning support state, but the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The configuration may be such that the first high winning support state is generated even in the case. In this case, only the first high winning support state may be set as the support state for the high-frequency support mode, or a plurality of support states with different winning easiness may be set. Further, the configuration may be such that the first high prize winning support state occurs only in the case of the high frequency support mode. However, considering that the high-frequency support mode is a state in which it is easy to expect winning to the upper working port 303 in the first place, in order to enhance the appeal of the first high-winning support state, the configuration of each of the above-mentioned embodiments is used. is preferred.

(35) In each of the above-described embodiments, the specific light emitting effect is a special effect for the first high prize support state. good. In this case, the specific light emitting effect is more likely to be performed in the first high prize support state than in the second high prize support state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a specific light emission effect is performed at This also applies to the specific display effect. However, from the standpoint of highlighting the first high prize winning support state and from the standpoint of suppressing player confusion, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments.

In addition, in a configuration in which the first high winning support state can occur not only during the low frequency support mode but also during the high frequency support mode, only the occurrence of the first high winning support state during the low frequency support mode is specified. A configuration in which a light emitting effect or a specific display effect is performed may be employed, or a configuration in which a specific light emitting effect or a specific display effect is performed in response to the occurrence of the first high winning support state regardless of the difference in the support modes. In addition, in the configuration in which the specific light emitting effect and the specific display effect are performed in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the occurrence of the first high winning support state during the low frequency support mode is more likely to occur during the high frequency support mode. It is preferable that this is performed more easily than the occurrence of the first high winning support state.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper operation port 303 at the time of transition to the support state and the upper limit of the opening period of each time are set, and if any of these conditions are satisfied Although the support state ends immediately and the electric accessory 307 is switched from the open state to the closed state, only one of the above conditions may be set.

(37) In each of the above-described embodiments, on the premise that there are four pieces of hold information based on the winning to the upper working port 303, the opening period of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state (opening multiple times If there is, the upper limit of the opening period of the first opening) was set to 3 seconds, but it is sufficient to suppress invalid winnings in relation to the judgment of the second special figure, so the period may be less than 3 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to set the period to 0.6 sec or longer, which is the game ball shooting cycle, so that at least one winning can be expected.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number while suppressing invalid winnings, the open period of the electric accessory 307 can be set to 3 seconds or more and 3.6 seconds or less. preferable. That is, the lower limit is the value obtained by multiplying the total number (5) of the execution amount of the second special figure and the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special figure by the firing cycle of the game ball, and the lower limit is It is preferable that the added value obtained by adding the firing period is set as the upper limit value.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, the first light emitting unit 311 is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, but the upper operation port 303 or the detection sensor for the upper operation port 303 (the game ball It may be provided on a flow-down path (moving path) to the sensor that detects the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 303 by detecting the passage. In this case, the light emitting means as the first light emitting part 311 is provided in the electric accessory 307 and both are integrated, or the light emitting means is provided inside the upper operation opening 303 (behind the opening and closing member 331 positioned at the closed position). It is good to In the latter, for example, the entire opening/closing member 331 or the electric accessory 307 or the portion overlapping the same light emitting means when viewed from the front is configured to have transparency (translucency) so that the light from the light emitting means It is preferable to make it visible from the front of the gaming machine through the accessory 307 .

(39) In the above-described first embodiment, on the premise that the number of pieces of pending information based on the winning to the upper working port 303 is four, the upper limit winning number to the upper working port 303 in the first high winning support state is set to Although it was set to 5 pieces, since it is sufficient if it can suppress the invalid winning viewed in relation to the winning judgment of the second special figure, it may be less than 5 pieces.

(40) In each of the above-described embodiments, the normal drawing hold information (release random number counter C4 and release type counter C5) stored in the electrician holding area 233 or the secondary electric work holding area 250c is A configuration may also be provided in which destination specifying means for specifying at a timing prior to the target of the figure suitability determination is provided, and a special display effect is performed based on the result of specifying by the destination specifying means. In this case, while the special display effect is started before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, it is possible to ensure a long notification period for the special display effect. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the special display effect, or to diversify the mode of the special display effect to enhance the effect of the effect. However, from the viewpoint of simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load, it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(41) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the relationship between the electric accessory 307 and the lower actuation opening 305 is such that when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, the receiving area RA becomes the lower actuation opening. It does not have to be formed on the flow-down path (first flow-down path R1) of the game ball to 305. For example, the configuration may be such that the winning opening corresponding to the lower operating opening 305 (starting winning opening of the first special figure) is arranged upstream (above) of the electric accessory 307 .

(42) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the variable display time of the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the normal result is fixed at 7 seconds, but multiple variable display times with different lengths are set. may In such a configuration, it is preferable to set the length of the first standby period in consideration of the difference in the variable display times. For example, it is preferable to set 7 sec and 4 sec, and then set the first waiting period to 2.5 sec. In this case, if 4 sec is selected as the variable display time of the second special figure game round corresponding to the first prize, the variable display of the game round is likely to end before the electric accessory 307 is opened for the second time. , Conversely, if 7 sec is selected, it becomes difficult to finish. As a result, even with the same normal deviation result, it is possible to create a case where an empty area is formed in the holding situation of the second special figure and a case where it is not. In such a configuration, the selection probabilities of the variable display time of 7 seconds and the variable display time of 4 seconds may be equal or different. Moreover, when the selection probabilities of both are different, the latter may be higher than the former, or vice versa.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which the variable display time of the said game round changes according to the pending|holding status of a 2nd special figure. For example, if the number of pending memories of the second special figure is less than 3, the variable display time of the game round of the second special figure corresponding to the normal deviation result is set to 7 seconds, and if it is 3 or more, A configuration in which the variable display time is set to 4 seconds can be employed. In this case, if the first waiting period is set to 2.5 sec, only when the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 3 or more, the variable display of the game round ends before the second opening starts. can be made easier. As a result, the pleasure of winning three or more game balls into the upper working hole 303 in the first opening is added, and the amusement is improved.

(43) In the fifth embodiment, the second special figure game cycle corresponding to the first prize can be completed before the second opening of the electric accessory 307. It may be configured so that it can be terminated before opening. In other words, by performing the third release, it may be configured to be able to hold the new hold information of the second special figure. This also applies to the sixth embodiment.

(44) In the fifth embodiment, the first waiting period is set to a period (5.5 sec) shorter than the variable display time (7 sec) of the game round of the second special figure. It may be set to a period longer than the variable display time of game times. In this case, when a game ball wins in the upper operation port 303 during the first opening of the electric accessory 307, if the game round corresponding to the winning starts before the end of the first opening, It is possible to surely end the game cycle before the start of the second opening. This makes it easier to create a free area in the reserved area of the second special figure at the time of opening the second opening. Also, the second waiting period (6.5 sec) may be set to a period longer than the variable display time of the game round of the second special figure in the same manner as described above.

(45) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the opening period of the first opening is longer than the opening period of the second opening. may be vice versa. This is the same for the relationship between the second opening and the third opening, or the relationship between the first opening and the third opening. However, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above-described embodiment, considering that it becomes easy to accumulate the number of reserved memories of the second special figure early in the first high winning support state, and the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the opening period of the first opening is set to be the longest, but the opening period of the second or third opening may be set to be the longest. However, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above-described embodiment, considering that it becomes easy to accumulate the number of reserved memories of the second special figure early in the first high winning support state, and the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind.

(46) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 are provided in the lower region PE4, and the game ball is shot so as to flow down either the left region PE2 or the right region PE3. Although it is possible to win prizes in both operation ports 303 and 305, it may be arranged so that it is possible to hit separately. That is, for example, the variable winning device 32, the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 305 are provided in one of the left region PE2 and the right region PE3. In this way, when the game ball is shot so as to flow down the area on the side where the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 305 are provided, each operation port 303, 305 can win configuration. In this case, an operation opening corresponding to the first special figure or the second special figure is provided separately from both the operation openings 303 and 305, and the operation opening is provided on the side opposite to the area where both the operation openings 303 and 305 are provided. It is better to provide it in the area on the side.

In the sixth embodiment described above, when both actuation openings 303 and 305 are provided in one of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, both actuation openings 303 and 305 are provided instead of or in addition to the first special display effect S1. You may perform the notification of the aspect which suggests that a game ball should flow down in the area|region of the side provided with. For example, when both actuation openings 303 and 305 are provided in the right region PE3, right notification can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to support the player's shooting operation, and it becomes easy to perform a game suitable for the switching state of the electric accessory 307 and the holding state of the second special figure.

(47) In the sixth embodiment, the second special display effect S2 is performed only when the number of pending memories of the second special figure is the upper limit number or when it becomes the upper limit number. The second special display effect S2 may be performed even if the number of pending memories shown in the drawing is not the upper limit number. For example, it may be configured to perform the second special display effect S2 not only when the number of pending memories of the second special figure is four (upper limit number) but also when it is three. In other words, if the reward (privilege) is small, such as when the prize is limited to one prize, the first special display effect S1 may not be executed.

(48) In the sixth embodiment, when the number of pending memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, the next opening of the electric accessory 307 ends. The second special display effect S2 may be displayed irrespective of whether or not the number of pending memories is reduced before the second special display effect S2 is displayed.

(49) In the sixth embodiment, the second special display effect S2 may not be displayed and the special display effect may not be executed during the display period of the second special display effect S2.

(50) In the sixth embodiment, the number of pending memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, and the next opening of the electric accessory 307 is completed. If the number of pending storage does not decrease before doing, it may be configured to grasp the pending status of the first special figure. On top of that, if there is an empty area in the reservation area of the first special figure, display "Aim for the navel chucker!" may be configured to perform Here, "Navel Chucker" is a common name for the lower actuation opening 305, and the above display can encourage the player to aim at the lower actuation opening 305 and shoot a game ball. As a result, the standby period can be used to support the winning of the lower opening 305, and the interest of the first high winning support state is improved.

(51) In the sixth embodiment, when the first special display effect S1 is executed, in place of or in addition to the first special display effect S1, the remaining number up to the upper limit storage number of the second special figure is reserved. A notification may be given according to the number (for example, a message such as "Let the electronic chew win x prizes!") may be provided. As a result, even if the player is concentrating on the special display performance, it is possible to proceed with the game while grasping the remaining number up to the upper limit memory number of the second special symbol.

(52) In the sixth embodiment, whether the first special display effect S1 is executed when the conditions for executing the first special display effect S1 are satisfied in relation to the second special symbol pending status. A configuration may be adopted in which lottery means for determining whether or not a lottery is selected is provided, and the first special display effect S1 is executed at random. As a result, the execution frequency of the first special display effect S1 is reduced, and excessive assistance is suppressed.

(53) In the sixth embodiment described above, the number of winning balls may be less than four when game balls enter the upper working opening 303 . Specifically, it is preferable that the number of game balls that can be shot during the opening period (1 sec) of the second opening of the electric accessory 307 (one piece) or less. With such a configuration, when the second special figure is opened for the second time in a state where the reserved memory number of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number, even if the game ball is made to enter the upper operation port 303, more payout than the number of shots is obtained. This increases the significance of refraining from shooting game balls. As a result, the player's interest in the second special display effect S2 increases, and the degree of attention to the special display effect increases.

(54) In the sixth embodiment, the second special figure pending status (in some cases, the first special figure pending status, or in the configuration described in (50) above, the first and second special figure pending Although it is configured to change the execution mode of the first and second special display effects S1 and S2 according to the situation), instead of or in addition to this, the execution mode of the special light emission effect (see FIG. 37) is changed. may be configured. For example, if there is a vacancy in the pending status of the 2nd special figure or if it occurs, the special light emission effect is executed at each specific timing, while if there is no vacancy or does not occur in the pending status of the 2nd special figure, the first and A configuration can be adopted in which the second light emitting units 311 and 317 are extinguished so that the special light emission effect is not executed, or the light emission intensity is weakened to suppress the degree of execution.

In this case, during the closing period (waiting period) of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state, the special light emitting effect may not be executed. According to this, when the special light emission effect is not executed at a specific timing in response to the fact that there is no vacancy in the pending status of the second special figure, etc., the execution status of the special light emission effect in the standby period is maintained as it is. In addition to simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load, it is possible to suppress the player's confusion caused by frequently changing the light emitting state of the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317. can.

Also, for example, when the transition to the first high prize support state occurs in the high prize support mode, at the first opening of the electric accessory 307 in the first high prize support state (at the start of opening or during the opening period) If there is no vacancy or does not occur in the pending state of the second special figure, a special light emission effect in advance (special light emission effect for 3 seconds before shifting to the support state of the electric accessory 307 (see A2 and A3 in FIG. 37)) , the configuration may be such that the special light emitting effect is not performed during the opening period and the initial opening period.

(55) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

It should be noted that the inventions described in the following feature groups are defined as "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a ball-entering part into which a game ball can enter and a game ball that can or easily accepts a game ball into the ball-entering part." There is known a variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which a game ball cannot be received or is difficult to be received in the ball entry portion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). The background art of "." was made with the problem to be solved by the invention that "there is still room for improvement in terms of improving interest."

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First information acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering section (function for executing winning processing for the lower operation opening 305 by the main control device 81);
a first determination means for performing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means (a function of executing the suitability determination process for the lower opening 305 by the main controller 81);
A second ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means (a function of executing the suitability determination process for the upper working port 303 by the main controller 81);
A first state (open state) provided in the game area, in which the second ball entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a game ball cannot be accepted in the second ball entering portion or is more than the first state. The second state (closed state) that is difficult to accept, and the variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to,
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing an electric worker support process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and a game received in the predetermined receiving area. configured to receive a ball into the second ball entry portion;
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow-down route (first flow-down route R1) of a game ball to the first ball-entering portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, the first determination is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion, and the second determination is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion. Under this configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion, the game ball enters the first ball-entering portion even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It may be difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry section. In other words, the player is deprived of the opportunity to receive the second determination, and the player cannot properly enjoy the benefits of the first state.

In this regard, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area on the flow-down path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball-entering portion reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball-entering portion, and reception of the game ball is prevented by the first ball-entering portion. Suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to receive the second determination is stably ensured, and the player can properly enjoy the benefits of the first state.

Feature A2. The variable receiving means has a movable body (opening/closing members 331, 511) displaceable between a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position. The second state can be switched to the first state by displacing the body from the second position to the first position,
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the movable body is configured to be positioned on a flow-down path of the game ball to the first ball-entering portion when positioned at the first position. .

According to the above configuration, the movable body for switching the state of the variable receiving means can function as a ball receiving portion for receiving a game ball flowing through the flow path toward the first ball entering portion. As a result, the game ball can be guided to the second ball entering portion at an intermediate position of the flow-down path, and the game ball heading for the first ball entering portion can be favorably entered into the second ball entering portion. .

Feature A3. Characteristic A2, wherein the movable body is configured to be retractable from a flow-down path of the game ball to the first ball-entering portion when the movable body is displaced from the first position to the second position. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the second state, obstruction of the flow of the game ball to the first ball entering portion by the movable body is suppressed. As a result, when the movable body is positioned at the second position, the player can play the game with the goal of entering the first ball-entering section, and the ball entering the first ball-entering section is not hindered. It is possible to improve the ease of entering the second ball entering portion.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the variable receiving means is configured so that a game ball can flow down in front thereof when switched to the second state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to utilize the area in front of the variable receiving means as a falling area for game balls. As a result, as a result of expanding the flow-down area and increasing the area that can be used as the flow-down area, the entire game area (the front surface of the game board) It is possible to reduce the ratio of the flow-down area occupied by When the flow-down area is enlarged, the movement of the game ball is diversified, making it easier to enhance the fun. Since it becomes easy to secure a space for enlargement, it can be a preferable aspect in a game machine with a limited game area. Furthermore, the area in front of the variable receiving means can be used as part of the flow-down path to the first ball entrance section, and the path can be easily simplified compared to the case where the flow-down path is constructed by bypassing the variable receiving means. Become. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the route to the first ball-entering section, thereby improving ease of play.

In addition, in the feature A4, "the front side" may be read as "the front side of the variable receiving means when viewed from the front of the game machine". Similarly, in each of the following features, "the front side of the variable receiving means" may be read as "the front side of the variable receiving means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine".

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the second determination is more advantageous to the player than the first determination.

In the above configuration, since the second ball-entering section is more advantageous than the first ball-entering section, the player strongly desires to enter the second ball-entering section. Therefore, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, there arises a need to allow as many game balls as possible to enter the second ball entering section. Under such circumstances, in the configuration described in any one of the above A1 to A4, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball heading for the first ball entering portion enters the second ball entering portion, 2 It is configured to give priority to entering the ball into the ball entering section. As a result, it is possible to provide a configuration that meets the needs of the player, and to increase the player's desire to play.

Feature A6. First privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering portion (function of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode for the lower operation port 305 by the main controller 81, payout control A prize ball function based on the winning to the lower operation port 305 by the device 97);
Based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering portion, a second privilege giving means (upper operation port 303 by the main controller 81) capable of giving a second privilege that is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege a function to shift to the opening and closing execution mode for the game, a prize ball function based on winning to the upper operation port 303 by the payout control device 97);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the second privilege is more advantageous than the first privilege, the player strongly desires to enter the second ball-entering section. Therefore, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, there arises a need to allow as many game balls as possible to enter the second ball entering section. Under such circumstances, in the configuration described in any one of the above A1 to A4, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball heading for the first ball entering portion enters the second ball entering portion, 2 It is configured to give priority to entering the ball into the ball entering section. As a result, it is possible to provide a configuration that meets the needs of the player, and to increase the player's desire to play.

Feature A7. Any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the variable receiving means and the first ball entry portion are arranged vertically, and the variable receiving means is arranged above the first ball entry portion The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the configuration in which the ball entering the second ball entering portion is prioritized can be realized with a simple configuration. In addition, the player can be given the impression that the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry portion in terms of appearance, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the variable receiving means is arranged adjacent to the first ball-entering portion.

According to the above configuration, since the variable receiving means is arranged adjacent to the first ball entry section, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the state of entry of the game ball into each ball entry section without moving the player's line of sight. .

It should be noted that when this feature is applied to feature A5 or A6, "Which of the first and second ball-entering sections the game ball enters is a matter of great interest to the player, and the first ball-entering section Since the variable receiving means and the variable receiving means can be easily visually recognized at the same time, it is possible for the player to easily grasp in which ball entering portion the ball has entered, and the ease of play is expected to improve.

In addition, when this feature is applied to feature A7, "the positional relationship between the first ball-entering section and the variable receiving means can be easily grasped at a glance, and the impression that a game ball easily enters the second ball-entering section is given." It is expected to have the effect of making it easier to give.

Feature A9. The predetermined receiving area includes a game ball that flows down a first flow-down path that can enter the first ball-entering portion, and a ball that cannot enter the first ball-entering portion or enters through the first flow-down path. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is formed to be capable of receiving both game balls flowing down the second flowing path, which are difficult to move.

According to the above configuration, not only game balls heading for the first ball entering portion but also other game balls can easily enter the second ball entering portion. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it becomes easier to expect that the game ball will be received by the second ball entering portion, and the expectation for the first state is increased. It is possible for the player to easily perceive the switching to the 1 state as a good opportunity, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the variable receiving means.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the size of the predetermined receiving area is larger than the size of the entrance of the first ball entering section.

In the above configuration, the difficulty of entering the ball into the second ball-entering section in the first state is kept lower than the difficulty of entering the ball into the first ball-entering section in the second state. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it becomes easier to expect that the game ball will be received by the second ball entering portion, and the expectation for the first state is increased. It is possible for the player to easily perceive the switching to the 1 state as a good opportunity, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the variable receiving means.

In characteristic A10, preferably, the size of the predetermined receiving area can be two times or more and five times or less the size of the inlet of the first ball entrance portion. By making it twice or more, game balls other than the game balls heading for the first ball entering portion can be made easier to enter the second ball entering portion. Moreover, the following effect is expected by making it 5 times or less. If the size exceeds 5 times, it becomes too easy for a ball to enter the second ball-entering portion, and as a result, the frequency of switching to the first state has to be reduced due to the specifications of the gaming machine. In this regard, with the above configuration, it is possible to moderately limit the number of balls entering the second ball-entering portion, thereby ensuring an appropriate frequency of switching to the first state. Furthermore, as a result of an increase in the occupancy ratio of the variable receiving means in the game area, there is a possibility that restrictions on the area where game balls flow down and the installation area of other game parts will be strengthened, but this is suppressed and the game area is limited. It can be the most suitable configuration.

In the feature A10, "the size of the predetermined receiving area" and "the size of the entrance of the first ball-entering portion" are respectively changed to "the size of the predetermined receiving area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine". and "the size of the entrance of the first ball entry portion when viewed from the front of the gaming machine", or "the width of the predetermined receiving area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine" and "the front from the front of the gaming machine". It can be read as "visual width of the entrance of the first ball entrance portion".

Feature A11. A passing portion (first and second game nails 281, 282) provided in the game area and having a passage width through which one game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the passing portion can flow down a flow path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion,
Guiding means (first guide portions 365, 603) capable of guiding game balls that have passed through the passing portion toward the first ball entering portion are provided between the passing portion and the first ball entering portion. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive ball entry into the first and second ball-entering portions by restricting game balls heading for the first ball-entering portion to game balls that have passed through the passing portion. . On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the passage part is guided toward the first ball entry part by the guide means, so that it can be easily directed to the first ball entry part or the receiving area, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. becomes.

In the above feature A11, "a game ball that has passed through the passage portion can flow down the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion" is replaced with "a game ball that has passed through the passage portion is the above-mentioned Game balls that do not pass through the passing portion can flow down the flow path to the first ball entering portion preferentially” or “Only game balls that have passed through the passing portion are allowed to enter the first ball. It is possible to flow down the flow path of the game ball to the part".

Feature A12. A game board (game board 24) on which the game area is formed on the front surface,
The game according to feature A11, wherein the guide means includes a wall portion projecting forward from the front surface of the game board and extending along the guide direction of the game ball when viewed from the front of the game machine. machine.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion can be stably guided to the first ball entering portion or the receiving area. Moreover, compared with the case where the guide means is constituted by a game nail, the game ball can flow down smoothly, and the stagnation of the flow of the game ball can be suppressed.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, wherein the guide means comprises a plurality of game nails arranged side by side in the game ball guiding direction and spaced apart from each other by less than one game ball. .

According to the above configuration, in the process of guiding the game ball, the game ball comes into contact with each game nail so that the flow speed of the game ball is easily reduced, and the period until the game ball reaches the first ball entering portion or the receiving area long-term. As a result, the visibility of the movement of the game ball is enhanced, and it becomes easier to perform effects utilizing the above period, thereby improving the interest.

Feature A14. The variable receiving means is configured so that a game ball can flow down in front thereof when it is in the second state,
Ball guiding means (second guiding parts 371, 403, 451, 503, first guiding part 603) capable of guiding the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state to the first ball entering part The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the area in front of the variable receiving means can be utilized as a guiding area to the first ball entrance portion. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the flow of the game balls to the first ball entry portion as compared with the configuration in which the game balls only flow down in front of the variable receiving means.

Feature A15. The variable control means is
variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) for executing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once (ordinary game state by main controller 81 function to execute the migration process) and
with
The specific state is controlled to end when the number of game balls entering the second ball entering section reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the upper limit number is 5 or less.

Where the second determination is made based on the game ball entering the second ball entering portion, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the second determination It is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid ball entry into the second ball entry portion when viewed from the relationship.

In addition, the above feature A15 is provided with "information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, with an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers,
The variable control means is
variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) for executing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once (ordinary game state by main controller 81 function to execute the migration process) and
with
The specific state is controlled to end when the number of game balls entering the second ball entering section reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the predetermined number is four and the upper limit number is five or less. ” can also be used. In this case, "the predetermined number is 4 and the upper limit number is 5 or less" is replaced with "the upper limit number is a number equal to or less than the addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number." You can read it differently.

Feature A16. The variable control means is
variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) for executing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once (ordinary game state by main controller 81 function to execute the migration process) and
with
The variable acceptance control is performed so as to change the variable acceptance means from the first state to the second state when an execution period of the first state reaches a predetermined upper limit period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the upper limit period is 3 sec or less.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid ball entry into the second ball entry portion in relation to the second determination. can.

In addition, in characteristic A16, "3 sec or less" may be read as "0.6 sec or more and 3.0 sec or less".

In addition, the feature A16 is that "the shooting means can shoot game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle,
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers,
The variable control means is
variable acceptance control means (a function of executing accessory opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) for executing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once (ordinary game state by main controller 81 function to execute the migration process) and
with
The variable acceptance control is performed so as to change the variable acceptance means from the first state to the second state when an execution period of the first state reaches a predetermined upper limit period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the upper limit period is a period equal to or less than a product of an addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and a firing period of the firing means. ” can also be used. In this case, "less than or equal to the product of the additional value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the firing means" is replaced by "not less than the firing cycle of the firing means and the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the above It may be read as "less than the product of the firing period of the firing means".

Feature A17. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering portion (function for executing winning processing for the lower operation opening 305 by the main control device 81);
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information function) and
A second ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state provided in the game area in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the second ball entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted by the second ball entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) switchable between a state and
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing an electric worker support process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and a game received in the predetermined receiving area. configured to receive a ball into the second ball entry portion;
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow-down route (first flow-down route R1) of a game ball to the first ball-entering portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, there are a game in which a game ball is aimed to enter the first ball entering section, and a game in which a game ball is aimed to enter the second ball entering section when the variable receiving means is in the first state. Coexist. Under this configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion, the game ball enters the first ball-entering portion even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball-entering portion, and the player cannot fully enjoy the benefits of the first state.

In this regard, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area on the flow-down path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball-entering portion reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball-entering portion, and reception of the game ball is prevented by the first ball-entering portion. Suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to enter the ball into the second ball-entering section is stably secured, and the player can properly enjoy the benefits of the first state.

Feature A18. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section (function for executing the winning process for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
Attachment determination means for performing attachment determination processing as to whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition unit corresponds to predetermined attachment information function) and
A first state provided in the game area in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the second ball entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted by the second ball entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) switchable between a state and
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing an electric worker support process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and a game received in the predetermined receiving area. configured to receive a ball into the second ball entry portion;
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow-down route (first flow-down route R1) of a game ball to the first ball-entering portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, there are a game in which a game ball is aimed to enter the first ball entering section, and a game in which a game ball is aimed to enter the second ball entering section when the variable receiving means is in the first state. When the game ball enters the second ball entering portion, the award determination process is performed. Under this configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion, the game ball enters the first ball-entering portion even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It may be difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry section. In other words, the player is deprived of the opportunity to receive the second determination, and the player cannot properly enjoy the benefits of the first state.

In this regard, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area on the flow-down path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball-entering portion reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball-entering portion, and reception of the game ball is prevented by the first ball-entering portion. Suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to receive the award determination is stably ensured, and the player can properly receive the profit in the first state.

Feature A19. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First information acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering section (function for executing winning processing for the lower operation opening 305 by the main control device 81);
a first determination means for performing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means (a function of executing the suitability determination process for the lower opening 305 by the main controller 81);
A second ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means (a function of executing the suitability determination process for the upper working port 303 by the main controller 81);
A first state provided in the game area in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the second ball entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted by the second ball entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) switchable between a state and
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing an electric worker support process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable receiving means is provided upstream of the first ball entrance portion,
When the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball cannot enter the first ball entering portion, or the game ball is in the second state when the variable receiving means is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball-entering portion.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, it is configured such that it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the first ball-entering portion. It correlates with the ease of entering the first ball entering portion. Thereby, depending on whether the variable receiving means is in the first state or the second state, a game in which a game ball is entered into the first ball entering portion and a game in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entering portion. can be clearly separated from the player's point of view. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player is restrained from being distracted by the first ball-entering section, and is effectively made to pay attention to the variable receiving means and the second ball-entering section. becomes possible.

Furthermore, since the simultaneous ball entry into the first and second ball entry parts is suppressed, the control required for each acquisition process for acquiring the first and second information and the determination process corresponding to each of these information It becomes possible to reduce the processing load. In addition, since the need to consider the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion during execution of the first state is reduced, game design can be facilitated.

Feature A20. The variable receiving means is
It has a movable body (opening/closing members 331, 511) displaceable between a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position, and the movable body is positioned at the second position. It is configured to be able to switch from the second state to the first state by displacing from to the first position,
The game according to feature A19, characterized in that, when the movable body is positioned at the first position, the movable body can block entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. machine.

According to the above configuration, since the movable body located at the first position directly prevents the game ball from entering the first ball entering portion, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, It is possible to suitably realize a configuration in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the first ball entering portion.

Feature A21. The first ball entrance portion is configured to open upward,
The variable receiving means is configured such that, when the movable body is positioned at the first position, at least a portion of the opening of the first ball entrance portion can be covered from above by the movable body. The gaming machine of feature A20.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the game ball cannot or hardly enters the first ball entering portion. In addition, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the movable body can prevent the ball from entering the first ball-entering portion in a practically preferable manner.

Feature A22. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state provided in the game area in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the second ball entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted by the second ball entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) switchable between a state and
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing an electric worker support process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable receiving means is configured to form a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow-down route (first flow-down route R1) of a game ball to the first ball-entering portion in the game area.

In the above configuration, there are a game in which a game ball is aimed to enter the first ball entering section, and a game in which a game ball is aimed to enter the second ball entering section when the variable receiving means is in the first state. Coexist. Under this configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion, the game ball enters the first ball-entering portion even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball-entering portion, and the player cannot fully enjoy the benefits of the first state.

In this regard, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area on the flow-down path of the game ball to the first ball entering portion. Therefore, the game ball flowing down toward the first ball-entering portion reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first ball-entering portion, and reception of the game ball is prevented by the first ball-entering portion. Suppressed. As a result, the opportunity to enter the ball into the second ball-entering section is stably secured, and the player can properly enjoy the benefits of the first state.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state provided in the game area in which the ball-entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. switchable variable receiving means (electric accessory 307);
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing an electric worker support process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable receiving means is configured so that a game ball can flow down in front thereof when it is in the second state,
Provided with regulating means (second guide parts 371, 403, 451, 503, first guide part 603) capable of regulating the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state A game machine characterized by

According to the above configuration, the area in front of the variable receiving means can be utilized as an adjustment area for determining the flowing direction of the game ball or changing the flowing direction. In this case, compared to the configuration in which the game balls simply pass in front of the variable receiving means, it is possible to stabilize the flow of the game balls and diversify the movement of the game balls, thereby improving the interest. do.

It should be noted that the "flowing direction of the game ball" of the feature B1 is "the flowing direction of the game ball in a direction other than the front-back direction when viewed from the front of the game machine" or "the vertical direction and the horizontal direction when viewed from the front of the game machine." It may be read as "flowing direction of the game ball in at least one of". Alternatively, after adding the configuration of "provided with a game board (game board 24) on which the game area is formed on the front surface" to the feature B1, the "flowing direction of the game ball" of the feature B1 is changed to "the front surface of the game board It may be read as "flowing direction of the game ball in the direction along" or "flowing direction of the game ball in the direction parallel to the front surface of the game board".

Feature B2. a first ball-entering portion as the ball-entering portion;
a second ball entry section (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and different from the first ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
with
The second ball entrance portion is arranged downstream of the variable receiving means,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the regulating means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means to the second ball entering portion.

According to the above configuration, the area in front of the variable receiving means can be utilized as a guide area. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the flow of the game balls to the second ball entry portion compared to the configuration in which the game balls simply pass in front of the variable receiving means.

Feature B3. A game board (game board 24) on which the game area is formed on the front surface,
The second ball entrance portion is open upward,
The regulating means and the second ball entry portion protrude forward from the front surface of the game board, and are separated from each other so that the distance therebetween is greater than the diameter of the game ball. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

Where the game ball is guided to the second ball entry portion by the regulation means, according to this feature, the game ball guided by the regulation means is guided to the second ball entry portion using the interval between the regulation means and the second ball entry portion. It becomes possible to deviate from the route to the ball entry section. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the game ball receiving the guidance from always entering the second ball entering section, but also to allow the game ball not receiving the guidance to enter the second ball entering section, thereby playing the game. monotonicity is suppressed.

Feature B4. The variable receiving means has a movable body (opening/closing members 331, 511) displaceable between a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position. The second state can be switched to the first state by displacing the body from the second position to the first position,
When the movable body is positioned at the second position, a game ball can flow down in front of the movable body,
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics B1 to B3, wherein the regulating means is configured to be capable of regulating the flowing direction of a game ball flowing down in front of the movable body positioned at the second position.

According to the above configuration, while the variable receiving means is properly in the first state, when the variable receiving means is in the second state, the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means can be preferably defined.

Feature B5. The defining means is
The flowing direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the movable body can be defined in a predetermined direction,
A wall portion (second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503, first guide portion 603) projecting forward from the front surface of the movable body positioned at the second position and extending in the predetermined direction is provided. The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized by:

In a configuration in which a game ball can flow down in front of the movable body positioned at the second position, if the game ball stays in front of the movable body, the game ball prevents the movable body from being displaced to the first position. is concerned. In this regard, according to this feature, in defining the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball can flow smoothly, and the game ball stagnate or rampage in front of the movable body positioned at the second position. is suppressed. As a result, it is suppressed that the stagnating game balls prevent the movable body from being displaced to the first position. to the first state can be satisfactorily performed.

In addition, in the characteristic B5, it may be further provided with a characteristic that "the defining surface of the wall part in the flowing direction of the game ball is flat". In this case, it is possible to further smooth the flow of game balls in front of the variable receiving means.

Moreover, in the above characteristic B5, the "first position" may be read as "the first position where the movable body protrudes further forward than the second position".

Feature B6. The defining means protrudes forward from the front surface of the movable body positioned at the second position,
Characteristic B4 or B5, characterized in that it comprises suppressing means (first guide part 365) that suppresses the game ball flowing down the game area from contacting the upper surface of the regulating means from above the regulating means. The game machine described.

When the game ball flowing down the game area comes into contact with or rests on the upper surface of the regulating means from above the regulating means, the flowing speed is greatly reduced immediately before or during passing in front of the movable body. Although it is feared that the flow of the game ball is slowed down in front of the movable body positioned at the position, according to this feature, this is suppressed by the suppressing means. As a result, the displacement of the movable body to the first position is prevented from being hindered, and the switching of the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state can be performed while utilizing the front area of the variable receiving means as a specified area. It is possible to do well.

Feature B7. The movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position,
The regulating means includes a facing portion that faces the front surface of the movable body in front of the movable body positioned at the second position so as to be spaced apart from the front surface of the movable body,
The game machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, wherein the distance between the facing portion and the front surface of the movable body increases downward.

According to the above configuration, when the movable body rotates from the second position to the first position, it is possible to suppress interference between the regulating means and the movable body.

Feature B8. The facing portion is formed in an arcuate shape that protrudes on the side opposite to the movable body located at the second position when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft of the movable body, and the curvature thereof is the same as that of the movable body. The game machine according to feature B7, characterized in that the curvature is substantially the same as the curvature of the locus of rotation of one point on the body.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to rotate the movable body while maintaining a substantially constant gap with respect to the regulating means. As a result, it is possible to preferably regulate the flow-down direction in front of the movable body while suitably suppressing interference between the movable body and the regulating means.

Feature B9. The game machine according to any one of features B4 to B8, wherein the regulating means (second guide part 371) is provided on the front surface of the movable body.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the area in front of the variable receiving means is used as the specified area in a practically preferable manner. In the feature B9, "provided on the front surface of the movable body" may be read as "connected to or formed integrally with the front surface of the movable body".

Feature B10. A game component (window panel 62) is arranged in front of the movable body and is spaced apart from the movable body,
The game machine according to feature B9, wherein the movable body is displaceable to the first position by rotating forward from the second position.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the defining means on the front surface of the movable body is displaced integrally with the movable body, the movable body is configured to be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position. . Compared to the case where the movable body linearly moves in the front-rear direction, interference of the restricting means with the game parts can be alleviated, and a large amount of displacement of the movable body can be easily ensured.

In the above feature B10, "the movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position" is changed to "the ball-entering portion opens forward to play games." The movable body has an opening through which a ball can pass, and the movable body can cover the opening from the front in the second position, and rotates forward from the second position to move the movable body to the first position. can be displaced to".

Feature B11. The movable body positioned at the second position and the game part are separated from each other so that the defining means and the game part do not intersect in the process of displacing the movable body from the second position to the first position. The game machine according to feature B10, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the regulating means from colliding with the game component in front of the player to damage the regulating means and the game component.

Feature B12. The movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position,
Characteristic features B9 to B11, characterized in that it comprises suppressing means (first guide part 365) that suppresses the game ball flowing down the game area from contacting the upper surface of the regulating means from above the regulating means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the configuration in which the movable body rotates forward to be displaced from the second position to the first position, when the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the regulating means from above, the impact causes the movable body to move to the first position. There is a concern that the variable receiving means will be in the first state regardless of the switching control. In this respect, according to this feature, the restraining means restrains the game ball from contacting the regulating means from above, thereby restraining the variable receiving means from suddenly entering the first state.

Feature B13. A game board (game board 24) on which the game area is formed on the front surface,
A lead-out means (first guide portion 365) for leading forward the movable body located at the second position, projecting forward from the front surface of the game board and leading the game ball flowing down the game area,
The lead-out means is arranged above the defining means in a state in which the movable body is positioned at the second position,
The game machine according to any one of features B9 to B12, wherein the distance between the lead-out means and the regulation means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, since the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the front of the movable body by the lead-out means, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the game ball enters the ball-entering portion. becomes easier. Furthermore, since the lead-out means is arranged above the regulating means and the distance between the two means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball from the lead-out means is easily led to the regulating means, further It is possible to utilize the means as suppressing means (means for suppressing contact of the game ball with the upper surface of the regulating means from above the regulating means).

Feature B14. The regulating means (second guide portions 403, 451, 503) moves from behind the movable body (opening/closing member 331, front wall portion 513 of the opening/closing member 511) positioned at the second position to the front of the movable body. has been extended to
The game according to any one of features B4 to B13, wherein the movable body has an insertion portion (notch portion 411, through hole 517) through which the defining means can be inserted at least at the second position. machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the area in front of the variable receiving means is used as the specified area in a practically preferable manner. Furthermore, the movable body can be displaced while the regulating means remains, and the downward direction of the game ball can be preferably regulated at both the first position and the second position.

Regarding feature B14, "the movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position. A game part (the window panel 62) is arranged as a part of the game part" may be applied. In this case, since the regulating means can be immobilized regardless of the displacement of the movable body, the regulating means can be extended forward within a range that does not abut on the game parts, and the distance between the regulating means and the game parts can be easily increased. can be less than a diameter. As a result, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the regulating means, and the flowing direction of the game ball can be suitably defined.

Feature B15. Characteristic feature B14, characterized in that it comprises suppressing means (first guide part 365) that suppresses the game ball flowing down the game area from contacting the upper surface of the regulating means from above the regulating means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, damage to the regulating means due to contact of a game ball against the upper surface of the regulating means from above is suppressed. Furthermore, the game ball is prevented from decelerating greatly just before or when the game ball passes in front of the movable body, and the stagnation of the game ball in front of the movable body positioned at the second position is suppressed. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the movable body to the first position from being hindered by the stagnating game ball, and it is possible to switch the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state satisfactorily.

Feature B16. A game board (game board 24) on which the game area is formed on the front surface,
A lead-out means (first guide portion 365) for leading forward the movable body located at the second position, projecting forward from the front surface of the game board and leading the game ball flowing down the game area,
The lead-out means is arranged above the defining means in a state in which the movable body is positioned at the second position,
The game machine according to feature B14 or B15, wherein the distance between the lead-out means and the regulation means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, since the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the front of the movable body by the lead-out means, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the game ball enters the ball-entering portion. can be made easier. Furthermore, since the lead-out means is arranged above the regulating means and the distance between the two means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball from the lead-out means is easily led to the regulating means, further It becomes possible to utilize the means also as a suppressing means.

Feature B17. A notch portion (notch portion 411) obtained by notching a part of the movable body from an edge portion of the movable body is provided as the insertion portion, and the regulating means can be inserted through the notch portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B14 to B16, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the regulating means extends from the rear to the front of the movable body, thereby regulating the flowing direction of the game ball, in a practically preferable manner.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the size of the notch in order to suppress interference between the movable body and the regulating means. As a result, it is possible to preferably regulate the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the movable body while suppressing a decrease in the rigidity and strength of the movable body.

Feature B18. Any one of features B14 to B17, wherein a through hole (through hole 517) passing through the movable body in the front-rear direction is provided as the insertion portion, and the defining means can be inserted through the through hole. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the regulating means extends from the rear to the front of the movable body, thereby regulating the flowing direction of the game ball, in a practically preferable manner.

Feature B19. The ball entry part has an opening that opens forward and allows the game ball to pass through,
The movable body is
a wall (front wall 513) capable of covering the opening from the front at the second position;
an extension portion (extension portion 515) extending rearward from the back surface of the wall portion;
with
The gaming machine according to feature B18, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position by linear movement in the front-rear direction.

In the configuration in which the regulating means is inserted through the through hole of the movable body, the movable body is displaced between the first position and the second position by rotation. is required, and there is a concern that the rigidity and strength of the movable body will decrease. In this regard, according to this feature, since the movable body is displaced between the first position and the second position by linear movement in the front-rear direction, enlargement of the through-hole is suppressed, and the above inconvenience can be favorably resolved. become. Furthermore, in this feature, when the movable body is displaced to the first position, the extended portion functions as a ball receiving portion that receives a game ball from above. As a result, it is possible to properly receive the game ball flowing down the game area. In addition, when the movable body is positioned at the second position, the opening is covered by the wall. is suppressed.

Feature B20. A projecting portion (first guide portion 603) provided in the game area around the movable body and projecting forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position,
Features B4 to B19, wherein the protruding portion extends at least to the front of the movable body positioned at the second position in a front view from the front of the game machine, thereby forming the defining means. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the above configuration, it is possible to construct a continuous defined path across the peripheral area of the movable body and the front area of the movable body, and it is possible to suitably regulate the flow of the game ball. In addition, since the regulating means can be provided so as to be formed integrally with the peripheral member of the movable body, the strength and rigidity of the regulating means can be increased compared to the case where the regulating means is provided independently in front of the movable body. becomes possible.

Feature B21. A game board (game board 24) on which the game area is formed on the front surface,
When the movable body is located at the second position, the front surface of the movable body is substantially flush with the front surface of the game board or located behind the front surface of the game board. A gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B20.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the front of the movable body, it is prevented from being caught by the movable body, resulting in stagnation of the flow of the game ball and damage to the movable body.

It should be noted that the "front face of the game board" of feature B21 may also be interpreted as the front face of the base body in a configuration in which the movable body is provided on the base body and game balls can flow down in front of the base body. can be done.

Feature B22. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state provided in the game area in which the game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball entering portion, and a second state in which the second ball entering portion cannot accept the game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. , a variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing an electric worker support process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable receiving means is configured so that a game ball can flow forward when it is in the second state,
A gaming machine comprising a changing means capable of changing a flowing direction of a game ball flowing down in front of said variable receiving means in said second state.

According to the above configuration, the area in front of the variable receiving means can be utilized as a change area for changing the flowing direction of the game ball. In this case, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball and improve the amusement compared to the structure in which the game ball merely passes in front of the variable receiving means. It should be noted that each configuration described in any one of features B2 to B21 can be applied to this feature, and in this case, the "regulating means" in each configuration can be read as "changing means".

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
Attachment determination means for performing attachment determination processing to determine whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit corresponds to predetermined attachment information (executing appropriateness determination processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main controller 81 function) and
A first state provided in the game area in which the ball-entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. switchable variable receiving means (electric accessory 307);
Variable control means for executing switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (executing electric support processing by the main controller 81) function) and
Notification control means for controlling specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control to be executed by predetermined notification means (first light emitting unit 311) (Function to execute processing during normal figure fluctuation by production control device 82 )When,
with
The predetermined notification means is provided on a flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area, and is configured so that the game ball can flow down in front of it,
The game machine is characterized in that the notification control means comprises means for enabling execution of the specific notification before switching to the first state when the switching control is executed by the variable control means. .

In the above configuration, since the award determination is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering portion. Under this premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the predetermined notification means, and the specific notification is made before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is configured to run. Therefore, the player can predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the expectation for the game ball to enter the ball entry section is heightened. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow-down path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, and the game ball can flow down in front of it. Therefore, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of game balls to the variable receiving means. As a result, it is possible to provide the game property of enjoying whether or not the game ball passing in front of the notification means enters the ball entering portion, thereby improving the amusement.

In addition, since the notification means is provided on the flow-down path of the game ball, the flow-down path can be utilized not only as a flow-down area of the game ball but also as a notification area. In this case, compared to the configuration in which the flowing area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to ensure a large flowing area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

Feature C2. The game machine according to feature C1, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided upstream of the variable reception means in the game area and around the variable reception means.

According to the above configuration, the notifying means, the game ball, and the variable receiving means can be visually recognized at the same time, and the points of interest of the player can be concentrated. This makes it easier to grasp the flow of game balls to the variable receiving means and the movement of the variable receiving means while paying attention to the specific notification. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to perceive the flow from the start of the specific notification to the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section as a series, and it is possible to realize a game performance in which the notification means and the variable reception means are linked. Become.

Feature C3. A game ball flowing down a first flow path (first flow path R1) and a game ball flowing down a second flow path (second flow path R2) different from the first flow path reach the variable receiving means. configured to allow
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided on each of the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the above configuration, since the game balls can reach the variable receiving means through a plurality of flow-down paths, the flow of the game balls to the variable receiving means is not unified, and the monotony of the game is suppressed. be. In addition, there is a concern that the visibility of the specific notification will be reduced by the game ball flowing down in front of the notification means, but in this feature, since the notification means is provided on each flow path, one flow path Even if the visibility of the specific information is lowered by the game ball flowing down, it is possible to grasp the specific information through another flow path. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the problem that it is difficult to grasp the specific information due to the passage of the game ball, and it is possible to achieve both the flow area and the information area.

Feature C4. The first flow path and the second flow path are adjacent,
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided so as to straddle the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is flowing down one flow path, it is possible to grasp the specific notification only by slightly shifting the line of sight. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means and the specific notification at the same time, and the presence or absence of the ball entering the ball entering section and the specific notification are prevented from being overlooked.

Feature C5. The predetermined notification means includes light emitting means (first light emitting unit 311) capable of emitting light,
The notification control means comprises a light emission control means (a function of executing normal figure fluctuation processing by the effect control device 82) that controls the light emission means so as to execute a predetermined light emission effect as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features C1 to C4.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means, the change of the light emission color, and the like. In this case, the specific notification can be made with simple contents, compared to the case where the presentation is configured by moving image display or the like using the display device. Therefore, even if the game ball flows down in front of the notification means, it becomes easy to understand the content of the notification, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized for achieving both the flowing area and the notification area.

Feature C6. The light emitting means
a light emitter (light emitter 360) capable of emitting light forward;
a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 341) disposed in front of the luminous body, through which a game ball can flow down;
with
The translucent part has a flat front surface at least in a region overlapping with the flow-down path, and is provided with a diffusion part behind the front surface for diffusing the light from the light emitter. The gaming machine according to feature C5.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which both the downstream region and the notification region are compatible, the light from the light emitter can be diffused and emitted forward while smoothing the flow of the game ball in front of the translucent portion. As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect without interfering with the flow of game balls.

Feature C7. The predetermined notification means is
a first light emitting means (first light emitting section 311) as the light emitting means;
A second light emitting means (second light emitting section 317) arranged around the first light emitting means and capable of emitting light;
with
The first light emitting means is configured so that a game ball can flow down in front thereof,
The second light emitting means is configured so that a game ball cannot flow in front of it or is more difficult to flow down than the first light emitting means,
When executing the predetermined light emitting effect, the first light emitting means may emit light in a first light emitting mode, and the second light emitting means may emit light in a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or C6, which is configured to enable

In the above configuration, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means arranged around the first light-emitting means are provided, and each light-emitting means can emit light in a different light-emitting mode when executing a predetermined light-emitting effect. ing. As a result, each light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a light emission mode according to the difference in the characteristics of whether or not the game ball flows forward (whether it is likely to flow or not). For example, the first light emitting means that allows the game ball to flow forward emits light in a light emitting mode that emphasizes the visibility of the game ball, while the second light emitting means that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to flow forward It is possible to emit light in a light emission mode that emphasizes attracting the player's interest. As a result, it becomes possible to easily grasp the flow of game balls flowing down in front of the notification means while directing the player's attention to the specific notification.

Feature C8. The game according to any one of the features C1 to C7, characterized by comprising guide means (first guide portion 365) capable of guiding the game ball flowing down in front of the predetermined notification means to the variable receiving means. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, not only is it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering portion, but also the flow of the game ball in front of the notification means can be stabilized. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the specific notification from deteriorating due to the game ball running wild in front of the notification means.

Feature C9. The predetermined notification means includes light emitting means (first light emitting unit 311) capable of emitting light,
The notification control means comprises a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means to execute a predetermined light emission effect as the specific notification (a function of executing the process during normal figure fluctuation by the effect control device 82),
The game machine according to feature C8, wherein the guide means has light transparency.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to utilize the guidance means as the notification area, and the decrease in visibility of the specific notification by the guidance means is suppressed.

In addition, when this feature is applied to any one of features C5 to C7 via feature C8, it may be stated that "the guide means is provided in the light emitting means and is characterized by having optical transparency". . In this case, it is expected that the guiding means can be used as a part of the light emitting means, and the visibility of the specific notification can be improved.

Feature C10. The predetermined notification means is provided as a first notification means,
A game cycle operation is started by a second notification means different from the first notification means, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle. , game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing by the main control device 81) for controlling the operation for each game round to be performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the notification regarding the action for game rotation reflecting the determination result of the grant determining means and the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable acceptance means are performed by separate notification means. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing both notifications, and to prompt the player to grasp the appropriate content of each notification.

Feature C11. The variable receiving means is arranged below the second notification means,
The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the first notification means is arranged between the second notification means and the variable receiving means.

According to the above configuration, while the player is paying attention to the second notification means, the execution of the specific notification by the first notification means causes the player to shift his gaze to the first notification means, and then follow the flow of the game ball. All you have to do is move your line of sight to the variable receiving means. That is, the natural downward movement of the line of sight starting from the second notification means enables the first notification means and the variable reception means to be visually recognized in an appropriate order, thereby facilitating the understanding of the performance.

Feature C12. As game states, at least a first game state (high frequency support mode) and a second game state (low frequency support mode) in which the variable receiving means is less likely to be in the first state than in the first game state. has
The variable control means comprises means for executing the switching control based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition in the second game state,
The notification control means, when the variable reception means is switched from the second state to the first state in the second game state, the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, further comprising means for controlling predetermined notification means.

In the second game state, since the frequency of switching the variable receiving means to the first state is low, there is a concern that the player's interest in the variable receiving means will fade and the player will be less likely to notice the switching to the first state. . In this respect, according to this feature, when the second game state is switched to the first state, the specific notification is executed, so that the player can easily notice the switch to the first state, and the game is played. Improves ease.

Feature C13. The variable control means is
mode determining means for determining a mode of the first state to be executed in the switching control;
means for executing the switching control in the mode determined by the mode determining means based on the establishment of the predetermined switching condition;
and
Modes of the first state that can be determined by the mode determination means include a first mode (low winning support state) and a second mode (first High Winning Support State) and,
The notification control means comprises means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is performed when the switching control is executed according to the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of C12.

According to the above configuration, when the variable reception means is switched and controlled in the second mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering portion, the specific notification is performed, so that the player can receive the specific notification based on the specific notification. When a game ball is shot so as to aim at the variable receiving means, it becomes easier to perceive the reward (entering the ball entering section). As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the specific notification, and to improve the presentation effect.

Feature C14. A second ball entry section (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering section (function for executing through winning processing by the main controller 81);
The second information acquired by the second information acquisition means is a second determination means for performing a second grant determination as to whether or not it corresponds to the predetermined second grant information (normal figure game round by the main controller 81 function to execute control processing) and
with
The variable control means is based on the fact that the result of the second addition determination by the second determination means is a second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second addition information. , configured to execute the switching control,
The notification control means controls the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is started before the switching control is executed by the variable control means after the second determination means performs the second application determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, characterized by comprising control means.

According to the above configuration, when the switching control of the variable receiving means is performed based on the determination result of the second application determination, the specific notification is made before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state after the second application determination is performed. is started, it is possible to execute the specific notification before switching to the first state while ensuring consistency with the mode of execution of the switching control.

Feature C15. A second ball entry section (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering section (function for executing through winning processing by the main controller 81);
a second information storage means (electrical holding area 233) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
Second determination means (a general map by the main controller 81) for performing a second addition determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to predetermined second addition information. A function to execute game round control processing),
With respect to the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the second provision determination when the predetermined second information is the target of the second provision determination is obtained by the predetermined a destination specifying means for specifying at a timing prior to the second information being the target of the second grant determination;
with
The variable control means is based on the fact that the result of the second addition determination by the second determination means is a second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second addition information. , configured to execute the switching control,
Any one of features C1 to C14, wherein the notification control means comprises means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is executed based on the identification result of the destination identification means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to ensure a long notification period for the specific notification while starting the specific notification before switching to the first state. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize the specific notification, or to diversify the mode of the specific notification to enhance the performance effect.

Feature C16. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
Attachment determination means for performing attachment determination processing to determine whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit corresponds to predetermined attachment information (executing appropriateness determination processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main controller 81 function) and
A first state provided in the game area in which the ball-entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. switchable variable receiving means (electric accessory 307);
Variable control means for executing switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (executing electric support processing by the main controller 81) function) and
Notification control means for controlling specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control to be executed by predetermined notification means (first light emitting unit 311) (Function to execute processing during normal figure fluctuation by production control device 82 )When,
with
The predetermined notification means is provided on a flow-down path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area so that the game ball can flow down behind it and can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. has been
The game machine is characterized in that the notification control means comprises means for enabling execution of the specific notification before switching to the first state when the switching control is executed by the variable control means. .

In the above configuration, since the award determination is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering portion. Under this premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the predetermined notification means, and the specific notification is made before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is configured to run. Therefore, the player can predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the expectation for the game ball to enter the ball entry section is heightened. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow-down path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, and the game ball can flow down behind it, and the back can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. and Therefore, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of game balls to the variable receiving means. As a result, it is possible to provide the game property of enjoying whether or not the game ball that has passed behind the notification means enters the ball entry portion, thereby improving the amusement.

In addition, since the notification means is provided on the flow-down path of the game ball, the flow-down path can be utilized not only as a flow-down area of the game ball but also as a notification area. In this case, compared to the configuration in which the flowing area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to ensure a large flowing area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

Feature C17. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81);
Switching between a first state provided in the game area and capable or easy to accept a game ball in the ball-entering portion and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. replaceable variable receiving means (electric accessory 307);
Variable control means for executing switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (executing electric support processing by the main controller 81) function) and
Notification control means for controlling specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control to be executed by a predetermined notification means (function for executing processing during normal figure fluctuation by production control device 82),
with
The predetermined notification means is provided on a flow-down path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area, and the game ball can flow down at least one of the front and rear of the game area,
The game machine, wherein the notification control means comprises means for enabling the specific notification before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.

In the above configuration, since the privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry section. Under this premise, in this feature, the notification means can execute a specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable reception means, and the specific notification is executed before the variable reception means is switched to the first state. It is configured. Therefore, the player can predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the expectation for the game ball to enter the ball entry section is heightened. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow-down path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, and at least one of the front and rear of the notification means is configured so that the game ball can flow down. Therefore, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of game balls to the variable receiving means. As a result, the player can not only be provided with a preparation period for shooting the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means, but also enjoy the game whether or not the game ball passing in front of the notification means enters the ball entering portion. It becomes possible to provide sexuality and improve interest.

In addition, since the notification means is provided on the flow-down path of the game ball, the flow-down path can be utilized not only as a flow-down area of the game ball but also as a notification area. In this case, compared to the configuration in which the flowing area and the notification area are separate, it becomes easier to ensure a large flowing area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Attachment determination means (appropriateness determination processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main controller 81) that performs attachment determination processing to determine whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined attachment information. function) and
The action for game round is started by a predetermined informing means, and the end of the action for game round is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 81) that controls so that the operation is performed;
A first state provided in the game area in which the ball-entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. switchable variable receiving means (electric accessory 307);
a variable control means (a function of executing a role object opening/closing process by the main controller 81) that executes variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means (normal game state transition by main controller 81) to transition to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed multiple times function to perform processing) and
with
In the plurality of times of the variable acceptance control executed in the specific state, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, the game round corresponding to the entering ball A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the subsequent variable acceptance control after the end of the game round corresponding to the entry of a ball.

According to the above configuration, the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering section, and the special information is stored in the information storage means. Then, a grant determination process is performed to determine whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and a game round is executed corresponding to the grant determination process. In this configuration, the number of special information stored in the information storage means decreases as the number of game rounds is executed, and the free space for storing new special information increases accordingly. On the premise of such a configuration, in this feature, in a plurality of times of variable acceptance control executed in a specific state, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, the ball entry correspondence It is configured to be able to execute subsequent variable acceptance control after the end of the game cycle.

For example, when a game ball enters the ball entering section in the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, it is specified from the start of the game round that the game round corresponding to the entering ball is configured to continue until the end of the specific state. A new empty area is not generated in the information storage means until the state ends. For this reason, it is assumed that the player's interest in entering a ball into the ball-entering section will fade after the number of stored information in the information storage means reaches the upper limit during the transition to the specific state. Furthermore, since no new empty area is generated in the information storage means, at most, only the total number of grant determination opportunities for the execution of grant determination based on the first ball entry and the upper limit of the number of special information stored is acquired. There are concerns that it will not be possible.

In this regard, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the ball entering section during the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control, the game round corresponding to the entering ball is terminated, It becomes possible to start the next game cycle. As a result, the variable acceptance control can be started after increasing the free area of the information storage means, and the player will be motivated to make the ball enter the ball during the execution of the variable acceptance control. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's interest in the ball entering the ball-entering section throughout the specific state. Furthermore, it is possible to obtain opportunities for determination of granting times exceeding the total number of executions of determination of granting based on the first ball entry and the upper limit number of memories of special information. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to enter many game balls into the ball entry portion during the specific state is enhanced, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

Feature D2. As game states, there are at least a first game state (high frequency support mode) and a second game state (low frequency support mode) in which the variable acceptance means is less likely to be in the first state than the first game state. and
The transition condition is configured to be established in the second game state,
In the specific state executed in the second game state, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, after the end of the game round corresponding to the entry ball The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is configured to be capable of executing the variable acceptance control.

In the first game state, which is likely to be the first state, the control state of the variable acceptance means (for convenience, referred to as the support state) in which one set of variable acceptance control is set once or multiple times is likely to be repeated at short intervals. Even if the number of acquisition of grant determination opportunities is small in the support state of , the player's psychology works that the shortage can be compensated for in the next support state. On the other hand, in the second game state, which is less likely to be the first state, the period from the end of the support state to the generation of the next support state tends to be long, and it is difficult to expect replenishment of grant determination opportunities. For this reason, unlike the case of the first game state, there arises a strong need to obtain more grant determination opportunities in the one support state. In this regard, in this feature, a specific state in which the variable acceptance control is performed multiple times occurs in the second game state, and such a specific state is configured as the feature D1. As a result, it is possible to create a configuration that meets the needs of the player and effectively enhance the attractiveness of the specific state.

Feature D3. The variable control means controls, in the specific state, a variable control period (a first open period and a first standby period) from when the previous variable acceptance control is started until when the subsequent variable acceptance control is started. The sum of the variable control period setting means for setting the
The game round control means comprises operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game round operation (variation display time of the game round of the second special figure),
The operating period setting means includes means capable of setting a period shorter than the variable control period set by the variable control period setting means as the operating period of the game corresponding to the ball-entering game. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature D1 or D2.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entering section in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, it becomes possible to execute the later variable acceptance control after the end of the game round corresponding to the entering ball.

Feature D4. The operation period setting means sets the operation period of the game round corresponding to the ball entry to be shorter than the variable control period set by the variable control period setting means, and the previous variable acceptance control is started. The gaming machine according to feature D3, further comprising means capable of setting a period longer than a period from an intermediate timing after the variable acceptance control to the start of the variable acceptance control later.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion during the period from the start of the previous variable acceptance control to the above midway timing, the game round corresponding to the ball entry ends before the start of the later variable acceptance control. On the other hand, if the ball is entered after the midway timing, it becomes difficult for the game turn to end before the start of the later variable acceptance control. In other words, depending on the timing of entering the ball, the possibility of creating a vacant area before the start of subsequent variable acceptance control differs. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to enter the ball at an early stage of the variable acceptance control is added, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

Feature D5. The game round control means is
selection means for selecting one from a plurality of predetermined game replay periods;
game-play period setting means for setting the game-play period selected by the selection means as an operation period (variable display time) of the game-play motion;
with
The plurality of game periods include a first game period and a second game period longer than the first game period,
The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein the first game use period is shorter than the variable control period, and the second game use period is longer than the variable control period. .

According to the above configuration, depending on the selection result of the selection means, whether or not the game cycle ends before the subsequent start of the variable acceptance control is different. Monotonousness of the game is suppressed compared to the case where the game cycle always ends before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the selection probability of the first game use period is higher than the selection probability of the second game use period.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easier for the player to experience a game in which the game cycle ends before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control. As a result, it becomes easier to receive benefits when the specific state occurs, and it is possible to increase expectations for the occurrence of the specific state.

Feature D7. The game round control means comprises operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game round operation (variation display time of the game round of the second special figure),
The operation period setting means sets the first period as the operation period when the number of special information stored in the information storage means is the first storage number, and the number of special information stored in the information storage means is the first period. means for setting a second period different from the first period as the operation period when the second stored number is different from the first stored number;
It is characterized in that, when the second period is set as the operation period of the game time corresponding to entering a ball, the variable acceptance control can be executed later after the game time corresponding to entering a ball ends. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

According to the above configuration, depending on the number of special information stored in the information storage means, whether or not the game round is finished before the start of subsequent variable acceptance control differs, and the number of special information stored is the second number of memories. In this case, the game cycle is likely to end before execution of subsequent variable acceptance control. As a result, when the specific state is started, the fun of aiming to enter the ball into the ball entry section is added so that the number of special information stored becomes the second number of memories, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

Feature D8. The variable control means includes means for making, in the specific state, an earlier execution period (open period) of the first state of the variable acceptance control longer than a subsequent execution period of the first state of the variable acceptance control. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it becomes easy to increase the number of special information to be stored in the variable acceptance control described above. This makes it possible to use the previous variable admission control as an opportunity to accumulate the number of special information stored, and use the later variable admission control as an opportunity to replenish the previously consumed amount. In this case, the player can obtain a certain amount of memory in the previous variable acceptance control, so that the player can enjoy a certain degree of profit by executing the previous variable acceptance control. As a result, a certain sense of satisfaction is obtained, and as a result, it becomes easy to have a psychological margin to enjoy whether or not the consumed amount can be replenished by the later variable acceptance control, and the easiness of play in the specific state is improved.

Feature D9. The variable control means according to any one of characteristics D1 to D8, wherein the variable control means includes means for maximizing an execution period of the first state of the variable acceptance control which is performed first in the specific state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easy to increase the number of special information stored in the initial variable acceptance control. In this case, the player can obtain a certain amount of memory in the initial variable acceptance control, and thus can enjoy a certain degree of profit in the initial stage of the specific state. As a result, a certain sense of satisfaction is obtained, and as a result, it becomes easy to create psychological leeway to enjoy whether or not the consumed amount can be replenished by subsequent variable acceptance control, and the easiness of play in the specific state is improved.

Feature D10. The variable control means sets a control period (first standby period) from the end of the previous variable acceptance control to the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control in the specific state. have the means to
The game round control means comprises operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game round operation (variation display time of the game round of the second special figure),
The operating period setting means comprises means capable of setting a period shorter than the control period set by the control period setting means as the operating period of the game round corresponding to the entering ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion during execution of the previous variable acceptance control, if the game round corresponding to the entering ball is started before the end of the previous variable acceptance control, the game It is possible to ensure that the cycle ends before the start of later variable admission control.

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein the later variable acceptance control is the variable acceptance control that is performed next time after the previous variable acceptance control.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion in the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, it is possible to end the game round corresponding to the entering ball before the start of the next variable acceptance control. . As a result, the player can efficiently obtain an opportunity to determine whether or not to grant the bonus in the specific state.

Feature D12. a first ball entry portion (upper working port 303) as the ball entry portion;
a first information storage means (reservation area for second result display section Rb) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as first information;
a second ball entry section (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and different from the first ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the lower operation opening 305 by the main control device 81);
a second information storage means (reservation area for first result display section Ra) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
Second addition determining means (main controller 81 a function to execute the suitability determination process for the lower working port 305 by
In a situation where the first information is stored in the first information storage means and the second information is stored in the second information storage means, the second grant determination is performed with priority over the grant determination. Priority means (function for executing winning process by main controller 81) to control,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in the configuration including the application determination process for the first ball-entering section and the application determination process for the second ball-entering section, the former is preferentially performed. As a result, when a game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the game turn corresponding to the entering ball is easily performed quickly, and each effect of each configuration according to any one of the features D1 to D11. becomes easier to obtain.

Feature D13. As end conditions for the specific state, a first condition that the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion is a predetermined upper limit number, and a second condition that the variable acceptance control of a predetermined upper limit number of execution times is completed. 2 conditions and are set,
The specific state is controlled to end when at least one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the upper limit number is set to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit execution count.

For example, in a configuration in which the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of times of execution, when one game ball enters the ball entry portion per variable acceptance control in a specific state, the number of times of execution of variable acceptance control The specific state ends before reaching the upper limit number of times of execution, and there is a possibility that the specific state cannot be enjoyed to the end. In this regard, according to this feature, since the upper limit number is set to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times of execution, it is possible to preferably solve the above inconvenience.

Feature D14. The shooting means can shoot game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle,
The information storage means can store special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit of a plurality of numbers,
The variable acceptance control is performed so as to change the variable acceptance means from the first state to the second state when the execution period of the first state reaches a predetermined upper limit period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D13, wherein the upper limit period is equal to or less than the product of the addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing period of the firing means.

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid ball entry into the ball entry portion in terms of the relationship with the award determination.

In the above feature D14, "not more than the product of the addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the firing means" is changed to "not less than the firing cycle of the firing means and the sum of adding 1 to the predetermined number." less than or equal to the product of the value and the firing period of the firing means. In addition, the ``period equal to or less than the product of the addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the firing means'' may be set to ``3 sec or less'', or ``0.6 sec or more and 3.0 sec or less. ” may be used.

Feature D15. A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Control means (function for executing game round control processing by the main control device 81) for controlling game effects to be performed by predetermined effect means based on the special information stored in the information storage means;
A variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can or is easily received by the ball-entering portion and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. (Electric Accessory 307) and
a variable control means (a function of executing a role object opening/closing process by the main controller 81) that executes variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means (normal game state transition by main controller 81) to transition to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed multiple times function to perform processing) and
with
In the plurality of times of the variable acceptance control executed in the specific state, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, the game effect corresponding to the entering ball A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the later variable acceptance control after the end of.

According to the above configuration, the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering section, and the special information is stored in the information storage means. A game effect is performed based on the special information stored in the information storage means. In this configuration, the number of special information stored in the information storage means decreases as the game effect is executed, and the free space for storing new special information increases accordingly. On the premise of such a configuration, in this feature, in a plurality of times of variable acceptance control executed in a specific state, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, the entering ball After the end of the game effect corresponding to , it is configured to be able to execute the subsequent variable acceptance control.

For example, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion in the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, the game effect corresponding to the entering ball continues until the end of the specific state. A new empty area is not generated in the information storage means from the start to the end of the specific state. For this reason, it is assumed that the player's interest in entering a ball into the ball-entering section will fade after the number of stored information in the information storage means reaches the upper limit during the transition to the specific state. Furthermore, since no new empty area is generated in the information storage means, at most, there are opportunities to execute the game effects for the total number of times of the execution of the game effects based on the first ball entry and the upper limit number of special information to be stored. There is also concern that it will only be possible to obtain

In this respect, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion during execution of the previous variable acceptance control, a game effect corresponding to the entered ball is produced before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control. It is possible to end it and start the next game effect. As a result, the variable acceptance control can be started after increasing the free area of the information storage means, and the player will be motivated to make the ball enter the ball during the execution of the variable acceptance control. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's interest in the ball entering the ball-entering section throughout the specific state. Furthermore, it is possible to obtain the opportunity to execute the game effect the number of times exceeding the sum of the execution amount of grant determination based on the first ball entry and the upper limit memory number of the special information. As a result, the enjoyment of aiming to enter many game balls into the ball entry portion during the specific state is enhanced, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Attachment determination means (appropriateness determination processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main controller 81) that performs attachment determination processing to determine whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined attachment information. function) and
A first state provided in the game area in which the ball-entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. switchable variable receiving means (electric accessory 307);
variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (function for executing accessory opening/closing processing by the main control device 81);
Notification control means (effect control device 82) for controlling specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of switching control to be performed by predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) Executes support state processing by effect control device 82 function) and
The notification control means is
Grasping means for grasping the storage status of special information in the information storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2503 and S2504 to S2508 by the effect control device 82),
A change means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasp result of the grasp means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by the effect control device 82). game machine.

In the above configuration, the special information is stored in the information storage means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion, and the grant determination is performed using the special information stored in the information storage means. is carried out within a range in which the special information can be stored in the information storage means. For this reason, even if a game ball is entered into the ball entry portion beyond the memorizable range of the information storage means, the entry will not be linked to the grant determination. Under such circumstances, in a configuration in which switching control of the variable receiving means is performed, in order to efficiently enter the ball into the ball-entering section, the variable receiving means is switched to the first state and the information storage means is set to a special state. If the information can be stored, it is desirable to let the ball enter the ball-entering section, and refrain from entering the ball in other cases. However, if the player decides to make such a decision, the player must constantly pay attention not only to the state of the variable receiving means but also to the state of the information storage means. tend to become

In this respect, according to this feature, a specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means is performed, and the execution mode of the specific notification can be changed according to the storage status of the information storage means. That is, in the specific notification, a correlation is generated between both the mode of execution of the switching control of the variable reception means and the storage status of the information storage means. Therefore, even if the player himself/herself does not grasp the switching status of the variable receiving means and the storage status of the information storage means, if he proceeds with the game referring to the specific notification, he/she can naturally play the game based on those situations. can be done with As a result, distraction of attention is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase concentration on the game. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification, and to enhance the effect of presentation.

Feature E2. The information storage means is configured to be able to store special information with an upper limit of a predetermined number that is predetermined as a plurality of numbers,
The grasping means comprises a storage number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the information storage means or the number of remaining storable numbers up to the predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the changing means includes means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasped result of the stored number grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification can be correlated with the number of special information stored or the number of remaining memories up to a predetermined number, and the game is played based on the switching status of the variable receiving means and the number of stored special information. be able to.

Feature E3. The changing means is characterized by comprising means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on whether or not the number of stored special information grasped by the stored number grasping means has reached the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature E2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the execution mode of the specific notification depending on whether or not the number of stored special information has reached the upper limit. A game that makes the most of the possible number can be played.

Feature E4. The changing means performs the specific notification in a first mode (first special display effect S1) when the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation, and the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation. Means for performing the specific notification in a second mode (second special display effect S2) different from the first mode or preventing the specific notification from being performed when the second situation is different from The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch the mode of the specific notification and the presence/absence of the specific notification in accordance with the transition of the switching status of the variable receiving means and the storage status of the information storage means, and perform the specific notification suitable for each situation. becomes possible.

Feature E5. Said first mode includes notification of a mode suggesting that said variable receiving means is switched from said second state to said first state, or prompting a player to aim at said variable receiving means. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first mode is a notification of a mode suggesting switching of the variable receiving means to the first state or a notification of a mode prompting the user to aim at the variable receiving means. It is possible to assist the player's progress of the game while taking into consideration.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the first mode includes notification according to the remaining storable number of special information in the information storage means.

According to the above configuration, the remaining storable number can be notified by the specific notification, and even if the player concentrates on the specific notification, the game can be progressed while grasping the remaining storable number.

Feature E7. A shooting operation means (shooting handle 54) for performing the predetermined shooting operation by the player,
The shooting means shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down a first area (left side area PE2) in the game area when a shooting operation is performed on the shooting operation means with a first operation amount. Then, when the shooting operation means is operated by the second operation amount, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the second area (right side area PE3) in the game area. can be,
The variable receiving means is configured to be able to receive or easily receive the game ball flowing down the second area into the ball entering portion when the second state is switched to the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E6, wherein the first mode is a mode of notification (right-handed notification) suggesting that the second area should flow down.

According to the above configuration, the player's shooting operation can be assisted by the specific notification, and it becomes easy to play a game suitable for each situation of the variable reception means and the information storage means.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the second mode includes notification of a mode prompting the player to wait for a game or stop shooting game balls.

According to the above configuration, the second mode is the notification of the mode prompting the player to wait for the game or to stop shooting the game balls, thereby assisting the player in progressing the game while taking into consideration the respective situations of the variable receiving means and the information storage means. can be done.

Feature E9. The notification control means controls so that the specific notification is performed at a predetermined timing before the variable reception means is switched from the second state to the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the grasping means includes means for grasping the storage status of the special information in the information storage means at the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance and shoot the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means. It can be done at the right time. Furthermore, since the storage status of the information storage means is grasped at the execution timing of the specific notification, the specific notification reflecting the latest storage status can be performed, and the reliability and interest in the specific notification can be enhanced. .

Feature E10. The variable control means is
a variable control means (a function of executing a role object opening/closing process by the main controller 81) that executes variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means (normal game state transition processing by main controller 81) to transition to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once function) and
with
The notification control means comprises means for controlling so that the specific notification is performed in a standby period (opening period, first standby period, second standby period) immediately before the variable acceptance control. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed using the waiting period of the specific state. As a result, the specific notification can be utilized as one effect in the specific state, and the interest in the specific state can be improved. Furthermore, since the specific notification is performed during the standby period immediately before the variable acceptance control is performed, the specific notification can be performed according to the most recent execution mode of the variable acceptance control, thereby improving ease of play.

Feature E11. The notification control means controls so that the specific notification is performed at a predetermined timing before the variable reception means is switched from the second state to the first state,
The grasping means is a change grasping means (a step by the effect control device 82) for grasping a change in the storage state that occurs when the variable receiving means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of S2505 to S2508.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance and shoot the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means. It can be done at the right time. Furthermore, after the predetermined timing, the change in the storage state that occurs when the variable receiving means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state is grasped. It becomes possible to perform specific notification in consideration of changes in the storage situation until the end of .

In the feature E11, "occurs until the variable receiving means changes from the second state to the first state and then changes to the second state" is changed to "from the predetermined timing, the variable receiving means changes to the first state." 2 state to the first state and then to the second state”.

Feature E12. The changing means is
When the grasped result of the change grasping means is the first specific situation, the specific notification is performed in the first mode, and the grasping result of the change grasping means is the second specific situation different from the first specific situation. In the case, the specific notification is performed in a second mode (second special display effect S2) different from the first mode, or means for preventing the specific notification from being performed (step S2505 by the effect control device 82 to S2509)).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch the mode of the specific notification and the presence/absence of the specific notification in accordance with the change in the storage condition until the switching control ends, and it is possible to perform the specific notification suitable for each situation. .

Feature E13. Characteristic feature E11 or characterized in that said change ascertaining means comprises means for ascertaining a decrease in the number of stored special information occurring until said variable receiving means is brought into said second state in said information storage means; The gaming machine described in E12.

According to the above configuration, even if there is no margin in the storage state of the special information at the time of execution of the specific notification, if there is a margin until the end of the switching control, it is possible to perform notification based on that. As a result, it is possible to favorably assist the player in efficiently entering the ball into the ball-entering portion, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Feature E14. The motion for the game cycle is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the termination of the motion for the game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process for the upper operation port 303 by the main control device 81) that controls so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed as a turn,
The change grasping means is
Remaining period grasping means for grasping the remaining period of the game round being executed at the predetermined timing (function for executing the processing of step S2507 by the effect control device 82);
Start determining means ( A function of executing the processing of step S2508 by the effect control device 82),
with
The gaming machine according to feature E13, wherein the decrease in the number of stored games is ascertained based on the determination result of the determination means for start.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately grasp the decrease in the number of stored special information that occurs during the period from the second state to the first state and then to the second state of the variable receiving means.

Feature E15. A game-playing action is started by the predetermined reporting means or a reporting means different from the reporting means, and the end of the game-playing action is indicated as a reporting result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. 1st game round control means (function for executing game round control processing for the upper operation port 303 by the main control device 81) for controlling such that the game round operation of each first game round is performed as one of When,
A second ball entry portion (lower operation opening 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring the second special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering section (function for executing the winning process for the lower operation opening 305 by the main control device 81);
a second grant determination means (a function of executing a right/fail determination process for the lower opening 305 by the main controller 81) for performing a second grant determination based on the second special information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
A second notification means that the action for game rotation is started by the predetermined notification means or notification means different from the notification means, and that the action for game rotation ends as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the second addition determination. Second game round control means (main control unit 81 executes game round control processing for lower operation port 305 by main controller 81 to control such that the game round operation is performed for each second game round as one game round) function) and
with
The change grasping means is
Execution status grasping means for grasping the execution state of the second game round at the predetermined timing (function for executing the processing of step S2505 by the effect control device 82);
When the second game round is executed at the predetermined timing, remaining period grasping means for grasping the remaining period of the second game round (function for executing the processing of step S2506 by the effect control device 82),
Based on the remaining period grasped by the remaining period grasping means, a start determining means ( A function of executing the processing of step S2508 by the effect control device 82),
with
The gaming machine according to feature E13 or E14, wherein the decrease in the number of memories is grasped based on the determination result of the determination means for start.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine that includes a plurality of ball-entering portions, that is, a ball-entering portion and a second ball-entering portion, and in which award determination and game rounds are separately performed in response to a ball entering each ball-entering portion, It is possible to appropriately grasp the decrease in the number of stored special information that occurs during the period from the second state to the first state of the variable receiving means and then to the second state.

Feature E16. a second information storage means (reservation area for first result display section Ra) for storing the second special information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
In a situation where special information is stored in the information storage means and second special information is stored in the second information storage means, control is performed so that the second grant determination is given priority over the grant determination. priority means (function for executing the winning process by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine of feature E15, comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration including the grant determination processing for the first ball-entering portion and the grant determination processing for the second ball-entering portion, when the game ball enters the first ball-entering portion, the Since the game round corresponding to the ball entry is likely to be performed quickly, it is determined whether the first game round is started before the variable receiving means is brought to the second state based on the remaining period of the second game round. can be judged properly.

Feature E17. The notification control means controls so that the specific notification is performed at a predetermined timing before the variable reception means is switched from the second state to the first state,
The grasping means
A first grasping means for grasping the storage status of the special information of the information storage means at the predetermined timing (the function of executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2503 by the effect control device 82);
When the result of grasping by the first grasping means is the specific state, grasping the change in the storage state that occurs until the variable receiving section is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. The second grasping means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2505 to S2508 by the effect control device 82),
with
The changing means is means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasping results of the first grasping means and the second grasping means (executing the processing of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by the effect control device 82 function).

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance, and it becomes possible to shoot the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, it is possible to perform specific notification taking into consideration not only the execution timing of the specific notification but also changes in storage conditions until the end of switching control.

Feature E18. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Attachment determination means (appropriateness determination processing for the upper operation opening 303 by the main controller 81) that performs attachment determination processing to determine whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined attachment information. function) and
A first state provided in the game area in which the ball-entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a second state in which the ball-entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. switchable variable receiving means (electric accessory 307);
Variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (a function of executing a general game state transition process by the main control device 81);
Notification control means (effect control device 82) for controlling specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of switching control to be performed by predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) Executes support state processing by effect control device 82 function) and
The notification control means is
Grasping means for grasping the storage status of special information in the information storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2503 and S2504 to S2508 by the effect control device 82),
When the comprehension result of the comprehension means is the first situation, the specific notification is performed in the first mode (first special display effect S1), and the comprehension result of the comprehension means is the second situation different from the first situation. situation, the specific notification is performed in a second mode (second special display effect S2) different from the first mode, or the specific notification means (effect A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by a control device 82.

According to the above configuration, an effect similar to that of feature E1 or E4 is expected. It is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the above features E2 to E16 to this feature, and in this case, "change means" in each configuration can be read as "specific notification means" .

In addition, the technical ideas shown in each invention of each feature A to E described above may be applied to each invention of each feature A to E. It may be applied to each invention of Group E. Moreover, all or part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to E can be arbitrarily combined.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (shooting handle 54) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and game balls shot to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part arranged in the game area. A game machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a port 31, etc.).

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

24... Game board, 53... Game ball launching mechanism, 232... Reserved ball storage area, 303... Upper operation opening, 305... Lower operation opening, 307... Electric accessory, 311... First light emitting unit, 317... Second light emitting unit , 331... Opening/closing member, 365... First guide part, 371... Second guide part, 403... Second guide part, 411... Notch part, 451... Second guide part, 453... Opposing part, 503... Second guide Part, 511... Opening/closing member, 517... Through hole, 603... First guide part, R1... First flow-down route, R2... Second flow-down route, R3... Third flow-down route, RA... Receiving area.

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a ball entry section into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
A first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball-entering portion is permitted or easily permitted, and a second state in which entry of a game ball into the ball-entering portion is restricted or is more difficult to permit than in the first state. and a variable means switchable to
with
In a predetermined case, the variable means is configured to be switched from the second state to the first state and then to the second state, so that switching control can be executed,
a first guide means capable of guiding the game ball on the upstream side to the downstream side from the ball entry portion;
a second guide means capable of guiding the game ball guided by the first guide means in the variable means to the downstream side in a state where the variable means is in the second state;
with
At least in a situation where the variable means is in the second state, the front end portion of the end portion of the first guide means on the side of the second guide means is the end portion of the second guide means on the side of the first guide means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be located on the front side of the gaming machine from the front end of the.

Images